DCS A-10C Warthog Guide

DCS GUIDE
A-10C WARTHOG By Chuck

LAST UPDATED: 1/12/2020
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• PART 1 – INTRODUCTION & TRAINING STRUCTURE
• PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
• PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES
• PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE
• PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF
• PART 6 – LANDING
• PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
• PART 8 – HOTAS
• PART 9 – SENSORS
• PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR AND COUNTERMEASURES
• PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL
• PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL
• PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS
• PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS
• PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
• PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES
Special thanks to Paul "Goldwolf" Whittingham for creating the guide icons. 2
The Fairchild Republic A-10C Thunderbolt II is a single-seat, twin
WARTHOG turbofan engine, straight wing jet aircraft developed by Fairchild-
Republic for the United States Air Force (USAF). It is commonly
referred to by the nicknames "Warthog" or "Hog", although the A-
A-10C
10's official name comes from the Republic P-47 Thunderbolt,

a World War II fighter-bomber effective at attacking ground
targets. The A-10 was designed for close air support (CAS) of
friendly ground troops, attacking armored vehicles and tanks, and
providing quick-action support against enemy ground forces. It
entered service in 1976 and is the only production-built aircraft
that has served in the USAF that was designed solely for CAS. Its
secondary mission is to provide forward air controller – airborne
support, by directing other aircraft in attacks on ground targets.
Aircraft used primarily in this role are designated OA-10.
The A-10 was intended to improve on the performance of the A-1

Skyraider and its lesser firepower. The A-10 was designed around
the 30 mm GAU-8 Avenger rotary cannon. Its airframe was
designed for durability, with measures such as 1,200 pounds of
titanium armor to protect the cockpit and aircraft systems,
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION
enabling it to absorb a significant amount of damage and continue

flying. Its short takeoff and landing capability permits operation
from airstrips close to the front lines, and its simple design
enables maintenance with minimal facilities. The A-10 served in
the Gulf War (Operation Desert Storm), the American led
intervention against Iraq's invasion of Kuwait, where the A-10
distinguished itself. The A-10 also participated in other conflicts
such as in Grenada, the Balkans, Afghanistan, Iraq, and
against Islamic State in the Middle East.
3
The A-10A single-seat variant was the only version produced, though one pre-production airframe was modified into the YA-10B twin-seat prototype to test an all-weather
WARTHOG night capable version. In 2005, a program was started to upgrade remaining A-10A aircraft to the A-10C configuration, with modern avionics for use with precision weaponry.
The U.S. Air Force had stated the F-35 would replace the A-10 as it entered service, but this remains highly contentious within the USAF and in political circles. With a variety
of upgrades and wing replacements, the A-10's service life can be extended to 2040; the service has no planned retirement date as of June 2017.
A-10C
4
RTFM, or “Read The F*cking Manual”, is probably one of the most commonly used expressions in DCS… especially when the A-10C is involved.
WARTHOG
These four letters represent what I hate the most about the flight sim community. “RTFM” is what you say to someone who asks for help when you want to get rid of him. The
philosophy behind this is that experienced pilots expect new guys to do their homework before they ask questions, since 99 % of the time the answer will lie somewhere in the
A-10C
671 pages long manual.
Is it fair? Yes and no. Some people genuinely dislike training new guys: it is a demanding task, it takes a lot of time and patience, and you need a structured approach and
exceptional communication skills to keep it somewhat interesting. On the other hand, giving a complex answer to someone who does not have a basic understanding of
aircraft systems may be a futile exercise. Sometimes, it is about ego: why would I give a new guy the answer when I had to read through the whole bloody manual to know this
stuff?
Whatever the reason, I think that the “RTFM” philosophy only works with someone who already has a background in aviation and is already aware of what he needs to know
to fly the aircraft. I believe that someone who has little to no background in aviation needs a little more handholding. There’s nothing wrong with that: real life Warthog pilots
are trained for weeks before they earn their wings. I don’t expect you to reach that level of proficiency. After all, flight simulation is not a full-time job: it is just a hobby.
The Warthog manual is a terrific resource, but it is a long, tedious and dry read. It is easy to feel discouraged and give up on the A-10C. I can’t tell you how many people I know
who bought the A-10C, and realized with horror that they had to go through a huge paper brick to be able to do anything. Where to start? What is important? Is everything
relevant? Can I skip some parts? Why do I need to learn this or that? All these questions overwhelm the majority of newcomers who give up and let the A-10 gather dust on
their hard drive, cursing the Flight Sim gods for their cruelty and the 40 bucks that went down the drain.
Therefore, I decided to create this guide to help the average Joe to be able to operate the Hog to a decent level. The structure of this document is how I would give a course to
someone who starts from scratch. Follow the guide section by section, and you should be able to know how to set up your controls, how the aircraft systems work, how to
operate your machine, how to use your weapons, how to navigate and how to stay alive.
I highly recommend that you fly the A-10C with a Thrustmaster Warthog throttle and HOTAS (Hands On Throttle-and-Stick). It’s expensive (550 bucks, yikes!), but for an aircraft
like the Warthog with so many switches… it is a necessity more than a nice-to-have. In my opinion, it is an investment that is completely worth it if you are interested in flight
sims since the quality and craftsmanship are top notch, and it just makes your life so much easier. You can fly the A-10C with a normal joystick, but be aware that you will have
a LOT (read: shit-ton) of key bindings to remember. So, just remember… stay calm, don’t panic, we’ll go through it together.
We will first see what controls you will be playing with and a general layout of the cockpit. After, we’ll see how to choose your loadout, fire up the aircraft, takeoff, fly and
navigate. We’ll get to know some fancy acronyms, see a couple of systems and how they work. Once you have all that unsavoury stuff crammed into your brain, we’ll blow
some stuff up (yay!), see how not to end up in a smoldering pile of ashes and how to get back on the ground in one piece.
Still awake? All right, let’s get to it, shall we?

5
A-10C “Legacy” vs A-10C II “Tank Killer”
WARTHOG
Throughout the guide, you will see certain sections that refer to the A-10C “Legacy” and A-10C II “Tank Killer” versions. The “Legacy” is the original version of the DCS A-10
released back in 2011. An expansion to the module was released in 2020, which includes new weapons, a Helmet-Mounted Cueing System (HMCS), a new 3D model, new
A-10C
HOTAS functions and various improvements to different systems across the board. Green and red tags as shown below specify whether a section is applicable exclusively
to a version, and the absence of a tag means that the section is applicable to either version.
A-10C II Tank Killer

A-10C Legacy
6
A-10C
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION WARTHOG
7
WARTHOG
CONTROLS SETUP HOTAS: “Hands On Throttle-And-Stick”
A-10C
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
Zoom In Slow: L_Shift+TMS UP

Zoom Out Slow: L_Shift+TMS DOWN
8
A-10C
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP WARTHOG
CONTROLS SETUP
9
Note: In your controls, make sure you check your “Trim” controls since the default version of the game has your trim hat set to changing your view rather than trim the
WARTHOG aircraft. Since most of you are probably equipped with a TRACKIR already, I suggest you make sure the Trim Hat Switch is set up properly.
A-10C
To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

select “Axis Commands” in the upper scrolling
menu.
To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

on the axis you want to modify and then click
on “Axis Tune”.
10
CONTROLS SETUP
WARTHOG
A-10C
BIND THE FOLLOWING AXES:
• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)
• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)
• THROTTLE BOTH – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM
• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT
• HOTAS SLEW HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL – CONTROLS YOUR TGP (TARGETING POD) ORIENTATION
11
CONTROLS SETUP
WARTHOG
A-10C
Use this pin to separate or link left and right throttles together.
Lock moves sideways
12
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG
13
A-10C
14
A-10C
15
A-10C
Pitot Tube
16
WARTHOG
A-10C
Flood Light
Thunderstorm Light
Thunderstorm Light
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES
17
WARTHOG
A-10C
Ejection Seat Handle

Emergency Manual Chute Control Handle

18
WARTHOG Formation Lights Brightness Control
A-10C
Anti-Collision Lights ON/OFF
Auxiliary Instruments Lights

Brightness Control
Accelerometer &
Compass Light Switch
Console Light
Brightness Control
Flight Instruments
Light Brightness
Position Lights switch
Engine Instruments
Lights Brightness Signal Lights Switch
Nose Floodlight & Nose
Illumination Switch
Flood light brightness
19
WARTHOG
A-10C
Main Air Supply Switch
Cabin Temperature
Level Control
Air Conditioning
Manual/Auto Control Switch
Cabin Air Temperature/Pressure Control Switch

• NORM: Normal, ECS (Environmental Control System)
runs on engine bleed air
• RAM: Ram Air, ECS runs on ram air from outside the
aircraft
Cabin Pressure Altitude Indicator (x1000 ft)

Cabin Air Flow Level Control
20
WARTHOG Windshield Rain Remove/Wash
switch
Canopy De-Fog Control
A-10C
Bleed Air Control

Windshield de-fog/de-ice
Pitot Heat
21
WARTHOG Internal Canopy Disengage Handle
AFT: Disengaged
A-10C
22
WARTHOG
A-10C
Oxygen Supply Pressure (PSI)
Oxygen Supply
Lever ON/OFF
Oxygen Dilution Lever

Oxygen Flow Indicator

Oxygen Indicator Test Switch
Emergency Oxygen Lever
Oxygen Quantity Indicator (L)
23
HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System) Mode Switch
WARTHOG • SLAVED: SLAVE mode, also called gyro-magnetic mode, allows the
HARS gyro to be fed by the compass signal.
• DG: Directional gyro mode. If Slave mode fails, the DG (Directional Compass LATITUDE Correction Setting Knob
A-10C
Gyro) mode acts as a backup. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled

from the compass and works autonomously.
SYNC IND
Shows sync between HARS gyro and magnetic azimuth
detector. Used in SLAVED mode.
HDG (Heading) Knob

Heading & Push-to-Sync Control
Magnetic Variation Selector Switch
N-S Switch
Selects which hemisphere (North/South) is in for DG and SLAVED modes.
24
WARTHOG ILS Frequency
ILS (Instrument Landing System) Volume

A-10C
Control & Frequency Selector

• Mouse Click: Tunes Volume
• Scroll Mousewheel: Tunes Frequency
TACAN Volume Control
TACAN Mode Selector

• OFF
• REC: Receive Only
ILS (Instrument Landing System) • T/R: Transmit/Receive
Power Switch & Frequency Selector • A/A REC: Air-to-Air TACAN Receive Mode
• Right Click: Toggles Power • A/A T/R: Air-to-Air TACAN Transmit-Receive

• Scroll Mousewheel: Tunes Frequency Mode
TACAN Channel TACAN Channel Selector
TACAN Test Button
TACAN Channel Selector
25
WARTHOG
A-10C
AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)

The AAP provides the power for both the
CDU and EGI (Embedded GPS/INS) systems.
CDU (Control Display Unit)
The CDU provides the control and
information interface between you and the
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) navigation system.
26
WARTHOG EGI (Embedded GPS & Inertial
Navigation System) Power Switch
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display
A-10C
Unit) Page Selector Knob

• OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the
CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen. From OTHER you
will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view
additional information.
• POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide
information about your current position.
• STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed
information about your steerpoint.
• WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can
view basic information about your selected waypoint,
CDU (Control Display steerpoint, and your anchor point.
Unit) Power Switch
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob

• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the
active flight plan active. If selected, use of the Steerpoint
toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT
PLAN must be selected to display the flight plan route on the
Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints
will only cycle through the markpoints that you created (A-Z).
Steerpoint Increment/Toggle
Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used.
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire
Switch
mission waypoint database
27
SYS FSK NAV FSK WP FSK OSET FSK FPM FSK
CDU (Control Display Unit) Functions System Menu Navigation Menu Waypoint Menu Offset Point Menu Flight Plan Menu
WARTHOG
EGI: Embedded GPS INS Data ALIGN: Position Alignment STEERPOINT: data on OSET: Determines FPM: Allows you to select a
selected steerpoint offset between two flight plan, create a new
points one, or edit an existing one
A-10C
Function Select Keys (FSK)

INS: Inertial Navigation System TIME: Data & Time, Desired ANCHOR PT: Anchor
Data Time On Target Point / Bullseye Data
GPS: Global Positioning System UPDATE: INS Update page WAYPOINT: Data on
Data selected waypoint
REINIT: Re-Initialization Page DTSUPLOAD: Data Transfer FROM PT: selects the
System Upload Page FROM POINT
LASTE: Low Altitude Safety and BLENDED: Combination of
Targeting Enhancement Data INS and GPS navigation input
HARS: Heading Attitude ATTRIBUTES: Course
Reference System Data Deviation Indicator (CDI) and
glide slope indicator
sensitivity
DTSAS: OPTIONS: current magnetic

Digital Terrain System heading and magnetic
Application Software variation
Data
RESET: Fault Reset DIVERT: 4 closest divert
airfields data
DTS: Data Transfer System
LRUTEST: Line Replaceable

Unit Test Page
OFPID: Operational Flight
Profile Identification Data
Line Select Keys (LSK) CADC: Central Air Data
Computer Data
CDUTEST: Control Display Unit
Test
MXLOG: Mission Log Data
28
SYS (System) Menu (Page 1/2)
WARTHOG
A-10C
EGI Sub-Page INS Sub-Page
GPS Sub-Page REINIT Sub-Page

LASTE Sub-Page HARS Sub-Page
SYS Sub-Page DTSAS Sub-Page RESET Sub-Page 29

SYS (System) Menu (Page 2/2)
WARTHOG
A-10C
DTS Sub-Page
LRUTEST Sub-Page
OFPID Sub-Page
CADC Sub-Page
CDU Sub-Page (Page 1) CDUTEST Sub-Page (Page 2)
SYS Sub-Page 30
MXLOG Sub-Page
NAV (Navigation) Menu
WARTHOG
A-10C
ALIGN Sub-Page TIME Sub-Page
UPDATE Sub-Page DTSUPLOAD Sub-Page

OPTIONS Sub-Page
ATTRIBUTES Sub-Page
31
DIVERT Sub-Page
WP (Waypoint) Menu
WARTHOG
A-10C
STEERPOINT Sub-Page 1 STEERPOINT Sub-Page 2
ANCHOR Sub-Page
OSET (Offset) Menu FPMENU (Flight Plan) Menu
32
CAUTION LIGHT PANEL
WARTHOG ENG START CYCLE L-HYD PRESS R-HYD PRESS GUN UNSAFE
Engine start cycle is in progress Left hydraulic system pressure Right hydraulic system pressure Gun safety is off and can be fired
below 1000 psi below 1000 psi
A-10C
ANTI-SKID L-HYD RES R-HYD RES OXY LOW

Landing gear is down and anti-skid is Left hydraulic fluid reservoir is Right hydraulic fluid reservoir is low Oxygen gauge indicates 0.5 liters
disengaged low or less (low quantity)
ELEV DISENG SEAT NOT ARMED BLEED AIR LEAK

At least one elevator is disengaged ------------ Ground safety lever is in SAFE Bleed air is 400 deg F or more
position (seat is not armed)
AIL DISENG L-AIL TAB R-AIL TAB SERVICE AIR HOT

At least one aileron is disengaged Left aileron is not at normal Right aileron is not at normal Air temperature exceeds
position due to MRFCS (Manual position due to MRFCS (Manual allowable ECS (Environmental
Reversion Flight Control System) Reversion Flight Control System) Control System) range
PITCH SAS L-ENG HOT R-ENG HOT WINDSHIELD HOT

At least one pitch SAS (Stability Left engine ITT exceeds 880 deg Right engine ITT exceeds 880 deg C Windshield temperature exceeds
Augmentation System) channel is disabled C 150 deg F
YAW SAS L-ENG OIL PRESS R-ENG OIL PRESS CICU

At least one yaw SAS (Stability Augmentation Left engine oil pressure is below Right engine oil pressure is below Central Interface Control Unit
System) channel is disabled 27.5 psi 27.5 psi failure
GCAS L-MAIN PUMP R-MAIN PUMP

LASTE failure detected affects GCAS (Ground Left Main Fuel Tank Booster Right Main Fuel Tank Booster Pump ------------
Collision Avoidance System) Pump Low Pressure Detected Low Pressure Detected
LASTE L-WING PUMP R-WING PUMP HARS

Fault detected in LASTE (Low Altitude Safety Left Wing Fuel Tank Booster Right Wing Fuel Tank Booster Pump HARS system Heading or Attitude
and Targeting Enhancement) computer Pump Low Pressure Detected Low Pressure Detected is invalid
IFF MODE-4 L-MAIN FUEL LOW R-MAIN FUEL LOW L-R TKS UNEQUAL
Inoperative Identify-Friend-or-Foe Mode 4 Left Main fuel tank has 500 lbs Right Main fuel tank has 500 lbs of There is a 750-lbs difference
capability is detected. of fuel or less fuel or less between two main fuel tanks
EAC L-FUEL PRESS R-FUEL PRESS NAV

EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) system is Low fuel pressure is detected in Low fuel pressure is detected in Control Display Unit failure while
turned off left engine fuel feed lines right engine fuel feed lines in navigation system alignment
mode
STALL SYS L-CONV R-CONV CADC

AFC (Automatic Flight Controls) malfunction Left electrical converter failure Right electrical converter failure Central Air Data Computer failure
or deselected detected detected
L-GEN R-GEN INST INV

Left engine generator has shut Right engine generator has shut AC powered systems are not
down or AC power is out of down or AC power is out of limits receiving power from inverter
limits 33
WARTHOG
Canopy Switch
A-10C
Canopy Jettison Handle
Boarding Ladder
Extension Button
Emergency Flood Lights

Battery Switch
Canopy Jettison Handle

Unlock Button
AC Generator Switches
APU Generator Switch
AC Inverter Switch
34
A-10C
CMS: Countermeasures Panel
35
WARTHOG
A-10C
Manual Canopy
Opening Assist Handle
Canopy Breaker Tool (used

to shatter canopy glass)
Flood Light
36
WARTHOG
A-10C
Left MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display) Right MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display)
37
Moving Map Scale
WARTHOG Adjustment Rocker Switch
MFCD Backlight Brightness
A-10C
Rocker Switch
OSB (Option Select Button)
MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display)
DCLT is used to declutter

MFCD Contrast Rocker Switch MFCD Brightness

Rocker Switch
MFCD Day/Night/Off Power MFCD Symbology

Mode Knob Brightness Rocker Switch
Note 1:
The four lower OSBs are Direct Access (DA) buttons (in pink) and provide direct access to the saved
MFCD displays according to master mode. Up to four pages for each MFCD may be assigned to the DA
buttons for each master mode. These pages are toggled by pressing the corresponding direct access OSB
button or they can be cycled even faster with the HOTAS buttons: Coolie Hat Short right for the right
MFCD and Coolie Hat Short left for the left MFCD.
38
1b
WARTHOG
A-10C
Saved MFCD Pages

Highlighted in Green when selected Main MFCD Menu
(Display Program) 2b
1a
2a 3a
Note 2:
In this example, we will change the STAT (Status) saved page to the
CDU (Control Display Unit) page. Then, we will display the CDU
page.
To access a specific MFCD page:

1. Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds on one of the four DA OSBs
(Direct Access Option Select Button). The DISPLAY PROGRAM
page will appear.
2. Select desired page with its respective OSB (shown in blue) from
the Display Program page. Once selected, page will be 3b
highlighted in green.
3. Once desired page is selected, click on the DA OSB next to the
desired Saved MFCD Page slot. This will assign the Saved Page
slot to the page selected in step 2. 4
4. To display the CDU page set in step 3, press on the DA OSB next
to CDU. The CDU page will then be displayed.
39
WARTHOG
A-10C
TAD Page Selected
TGP Page Selected

TAD DSMS TGP STAT TGP MAV CDU MSG
Saved but not displayed on MFCD

Saved but not displayed on MFCD
Displayed on MFCD Coolie Hat Switch
Coolie Hat left Short cycles left MFCD page Displayed on MFCD
Coolie Hat right Short cycles right MFCD page
LEFT MFCD RIGHT MFCD 40
WARTHOG
A-10C
MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display) Pages

TAD (Tactical Awareness Display): STAT (Status): Review status of A-10C sub-systems
Use the digital, moving map for navigation, targeting,
and datalink purposes
TGP (Targeting Pod): LITENING targeting pod page DTS (Data Transfer System): Load navigation and
weapon data from the mission planner into the
aircraft. In the real-world, this would be done with a
Data Transfer Cartridge that loads data from the
Mission Planning Software onto the aircraft
DP Page
DSMS (Digital Stores Management System): Manage DP (Display Program): Configure which page-links
the stores of the aircraft are to be displayed on the bottom of each MFCD
MSG (Message): Send and receive text messages MAV (Maverick): Employ various models of the
with other units on SADL datalink network AGM-65 Maverick air-to-surface missile
CDU (Control Display Unit):
View the CDU screen display on an MFCD
41
WARTHOG
A-10C
TAD Page DSMS Page STAT Page

TGP Page 42
MSG Page CDU Page
A-10C
MAV Page
DTS Page
43
Left Hydraulic System
WARTHOG Pressure Gauge (x1000 psi) Right Hydraulic System
Pressure Gauge (x1000 psi)
A-10C
Right Fuel System

Left Fuel System Quantity Indicator
Quantity Indicator (x1000 lbs)
(x1000 lbs)
Total Fuel Quantity Indicator

(x1000 lbs)
Fuel Quantity Display Selector

Internal/Main/Wing/External Wing/External Centerline
Fuel Indicator Test Switch 44

WARTHOG Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)
Engine Core (Compressor)
Engine ITT: Interstage
Speed (%RPM)
A-10C
Turbine Temperature (deg C)

Engine Fuel Flow Indicators

(x100 lbs/hour)
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI) APU (Auxiliary Power APU EGT (Exhaust Gas
Unit) RPM (%) Temperature) Indicator (deg C)
45
WARTHOG
ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
A-10C
Vertical Velocity Indicator

(x1000 ft/min)
Altimeter (ft)
Barometric Pressure
Setting (in Hg)
Turn & Slip Indicator
ADI Pitch Trim Knob Altimeter Mode Switch

Select normal electric mode (ELECT) or pneumatic mode (PNEU) for altimeter operation.
46 In
Barometric Pressure Setting Adjustment Knob case of a CADC (Central Air Data Computer) failure, you should set the instrument to PNEU.
WARTHOG
A-10C
External Stores Jettison Button

Jettisons all external stores except
Targeting Pod and ECM pods
Fire Extinguisher Discharge Switch
Left Engine Fire Detection Light APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) Fire Detection
& Fire Extinguisher Handle Light & Fire Extinguisher Handle Right Engine Fire Detection Light
& Fire Extinguisher Handle 47
Accelerometer (G) Standby Magnetic Compass
WARTHOG
A-10C
Air-to-Air Refueling READY Light
Air-to-Air Refueling LATCHED Light

Refueling boom is connected/latched
Air-to-Air Refueling DISCONNECT Light

AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer

The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated green and yellow symbols.
• Low-speed symbol "\ /“
• On-speed symbol "circle“
• High-speed symbol "/ \".
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.
Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is down. 48
Mirror
WARTHOG
A-10C
Mirror Mirror
HUD (Heads-Up Display)

49
WARTHOG
Depressible Gun Pipper Pitch Ladder (deg)
A-10C
Destination Index (Tadpole)

TVV (Total Velocity Vector) indicates relative bearing to the selected steerpoint
(also called Flight Path Marker)
Anchor Point Display (Bullseye)
G-Meter Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point to Aircraft /
Distance from aircraft to Anchor Point (nm)
TDC (Target Designation Cursor) Barometric Altitude (ft)

Airspeed (kts)
G: Ground Speed
T: True Airspeed Flight Path Angle (deg)
No letter: Indicated Airspeed
Radar Altitude (ft)

Required Airspeed to meet Time-On-Target (kts) XXXX: Radar Altitude is invalid or
above 5000 ft AGL
Pave Penny Cue Index
Provide a method for acquiring the TISL (Target
Identification Set Laser) Spider Selected Steerpoint Number / Name
HUD SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk

Distance to Steerpoint (nm) / Target Elevation
DTSAS (Digital Terrain System Application Software) at the location of the CCRP Reticle (ft)
Mode and FOM (Figure of Merit) Message Shown: 0.5 nm to Steerpoint
Heading Tape / Scratchpad Data Display Time to Go (TTG) and Time on

Target Delta (TOT)
Desired Magnetic Heading Current Time

to Selected Steerpoint
SPI Sensor Indicator

STPT: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Steerpoint 50
A-10C
51
WARTHOG
A-10C
Master Caution
UFC (Up Front Controller)

Gun READY Indicator

Canopy Unlocked Indicator
Nosewheel Steering Marker Beacon Indicator

ENGAGED Indicator
52
CMSC ( Countermeasures Set Control)
LTR (Letter) Mode Button FUNC (Function) Mode Button
Allows you to enter letter characters on Allows remote selection of CDU and AAP
WARTHOG
the HUD and CDU scratchpads functions listed underneath buttons
Special Purpose “ENT” (Enter) Button
A-10C
Special Purpose “HACK”

(Time Hack) Button
Data Page Increment Rocker Switch
Select Rocker Switch

Steerpoint Increment
Rocker Switch
Depressible Pipper
Rocker Switch
HUD Brightness Intensity

Rocker Switch
Special Purpose “SPC” (Space) Button Special Purpose “MK” (Mark) Button
Special Purpose “ALT ALRT” (Altitude

Alert) Button
Special Purpose “CLR” (Clear) Button
53
Correspondence between UFC (Up-Front Control) Panel Buttons and
WARTHOG
CDU (Control Display Unit)/AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel) Functions CDU
A-10C
Function Select Keys (FSK)

UFC • SYS (System)
• NAV (Navigation)
• WP (Waypoint)
• OSET (Offset Point)
• FPM (Flight Plan Menu)
• PREV (Previous)
FUNC (Function) Mode Button
Allows remote selection of CDU and AAP
functions listed underneath buttons
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Page Selector Knob
• OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen.
From OTHER you will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view additional information.
• POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide information about your current position.
• STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed information about your steerpoint.
• WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can view basic information about your AAP
selected waypoint, steerpoint, and your anchor point.
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob

• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the active flight plan active. If selected,
use of the Steerpoint toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT PLAN must be
selected to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints will only cycle through the
markpoints that you created (A-Z). Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used.
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire mission waypoint database 54
WARTHOG RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
A-10C
Airspeed Indicator (x100 kts)

White needle: Current airspeed
Hashed needle: Max airspeed
Rotary drum: decimals of main dial
Max flap & gear extension speed: 200 kts
55
WARTHOG
Lubber Line
A-10C
(Current Heading)
Range to selected Steerpoint or

TACAN station (nautical miles)
CDI (Course Deviation Indicator)
Course Selector Indicator
Aircraft Symbol
HSI Heading Setting Bug

HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
HSI Course Selector Knob

HSI Heading Bug Setting Knob
56
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference
WARTHOG System) Mode Selector
ABLE/STOW ADI (Attitude Director
A-10C
Indicator) Localizer Bar Switch
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode

Selector
TISL (Target Identification

Set Laser) Mode Selector
UHF Homing Light

When the UHF control panel is set to
ADF (Automatic Direction Finder)
STR PT (Steer Point) Mode Selector
mode, the UHF light will turn amber
Course Deviator Indicator (CDI) on the
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

operates in relationship to a steer point.
FM Homing Light
When the VHF/FM control panel is set to
homing mode, the FM light will turn amber.
ANCHR (Anchor Point / Bullseye)

HSI and Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
needles will point to the Anchor Point
(Bullseye).
ILS (Instrumented Landing

NMSP/NIMSIP: NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL System) Mode Selector
• HARS and EGI send data to HUD, ADI and HSI and cannot be used at the same
time. HARS is usually used as a backup system to EGI.
• TISL, TACAN and ILS use beacons and stations to navigate to and cannot be TCN (TACAN) Mode Selector
57
used at the same time.
TISL (Target Identification Set Laser) Mode Selector
WARTHOG TISL system detects and tracks reflected laser energy. TISL does NOT emit any laser energy; it is a passive-only system. The TISL can be
used to locate targets being laser designated by another asset such as another aircraft or ground forces. This panel is not functionally
implemented in this simulation. With the A-10C, all laser spot detection is done with the targeting pod in LSS/LST modes.
• Modes: OFF / CAGE / DIVE / LVL NAR / LVL WIDE
A-10C
TISL slant range selection

OVER 10 nm/5-10 nm/UNDER 5 nm
TISL Altitude Above Target Indicator

(x1000 ft)
TISL Function Buttons

ENTER / OVER TEMP / BITE (test) / TRACK
TISL Code Selector Thumb Wheels

and Indicators
TISL Code Select Switch

What system searches for entered laser code
• TISL/BOTH/AUX
58
WARTHOG
A-10C
Auxiliary Landing Gear

Extension Handle
Pedal Adjustment Handle
Circuit Breaker Panel
59
WARTHOG
Master Mode Toggle Button
Weapon Release Button
A-10C
Trim Hat Switch

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
TMS (Target Management Switch)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)
DMS (Data Management Switch)

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
HOTAS Stick
CMS (Countermeasures Switch)

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT/PRESS
Nosewheel Steering Button
60
SAI (Standby Attitude Indicator)
WARTHOG
A-10C
SAI (Standby Attitude Indicator)

Caging Knob
UHF Radio Frequency Repeater
Clock AOA (Angle of Attack)

61
Indicator (deg)
WARTHOG
Master Arm Switch

A-10C
Laser Arming Switch ARM/SAFE/TRAINING

GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude
ARM/SAFE/TRAINING
Correction) Arming Switch
• ARM: Gun Armed, PAC enabled
• SAFE: Gun Not Armed, PAC disabled
• GUNARM, Gun Armed, PAC disabled
TGP (Targeting Pod) Power Switch

AHCP (Armament
HUD Control Panel)
HUD Modes Selector

Normal/Standby
ALT SCE (Altitude Source) Selector HUD modes Selector

• BARO: Altitude derived from Barometric Day/Night
Pressure
• DELTA: Altitude derived from difference
between barometric and radar altimeter IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire
• RADAR: Altitude derived from Radar Control Computer) Power Switch
Altimeter
JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) Power Switch

HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System)
Fast Erect Button
Corrects HARS errors CICU (Central Interface Control Unit) Power Switch 62
Landing Gear Position Indicator Anti-Skid Switch
WARTHOG UP: ON
Light
• LSAFE/NSAFE: Down and Locked Landing/Taxi Lights Switch
• Extinguished: Up and Locked
A-10C
Landing Gear Downlock

Solenoid Override Button
Flaps Position Indicator (deg)
TEMS (Turbine Engine

Monitoring System) Switch
Provides engine diagnostic data for
Landing Gear Control Lever 63
maintenance support.
WARTHOG
Manual Canopy
Opening Assist Handle
A-10C
TV Function (Not functional)

Video Selector TV/HUD

(Not Functional)
Seat Height Adjustment Switch
Emergency Brake Handle 64

Fuselage EXT TKS Switch
WARTHOG Transfer fuel from external fuselage tank Signal Amplifier Switch
(not functional)
Wing EXT TKS Switch
A-10C
Transfers fuel from external wing tanks

Exterior Lighting Brightness Control Knob
Used to help during aerial refueling
Fuel Crossfeed Switch
Fuel Line Check Button

Internal Fuel Tank Gate
(not functional)
Open/Close
Wing Fuel Tank Boost

Pump Switches
Air Refueling Door Control Lever
Open/close refueling port slipway door
Fill Wing Fuel Tank Disable

Used when battle damage is sustained
Main Fuel Tank Boost
Pump Switches
Fill Main Fuel Tank Disable

Used when battle damage is sustained
65
Refueling & Indexer Light Brightness
WARTHOG
A-10C
Night Vision Imaging System

(NVIS) Control Switch
Weapon Station Status Lights

Dimmer (Not Functional)
HARS/SAS (Heading &

Attitude Reference System / Fire Detect Bleed Air Leak
Stability Augmentation Signal Lights Test Button Test Button
System) Override Switch
66
External Lights “Pinky” Switch
WARTHOG This switch can be seen as a “Master Lights” switch.
• FWD: Retains set illumination levels for formation lights, nose floodlights and nacelle
floodlights. Sets position lights to STEADY and disables anti-collision lights.
• MIDDLE: Turns off all external lights
A-10C
• AFT: Lights are set according to lighting control panel settings.
Left & Right Throttles

Left Throttle Button
Toggles Autopilot
Slew Control Switch

Speed Brake Switch
Microphone Switch
• FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM)
• DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio
Boat Switch
China Hat Switch

Coolie Hat Switch 67
WARTHOG
Ejection Seat Handle
A-10C
Shoulder Harness Lever

68
WARTHOG
A-10C
Engine Flow Switches

NORM: No exceeding ITT is possible
OVERRIDE: Exceeding ITT is possible
Engine Operation Switches

IGN: Manual Engine Ignition
NORM: Normal Engine Ignition

MOTOR: Purge Engine Combustion Chamber
APU Starter Switch

(Auxiliary Power Unit)
Throttle Friction Control
Landing Gear Warning Silence Switch

Flaps Control Switch
• Position 1: UP (0 deg)
• Position 2: MVR (Maneuver) (7 deg for takeoff)
• Position 3: DN (Down, 20 deg)
If airspeed exceeds 185 KIAS, the flaps cannot be extended. If the flaps are extended and the aircraft 69
reaches 185 KIAS or greater, the flaps will automatically retract to the UP position.
WARTHOG SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
A-10C
Takeoff Trim Indicator Light
Yaw Trim Control Knob

Takeoff Trim Control Button
Monitor Test Switch

(Not Functional)
70
WARTHOG
EAC (Enhanced Attitude

A-10C
IFF (Identify Friend or Foe) Panel Control) Switch
Radar Altimeter Switch
Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button
Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode

Selector Switch
• PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude
LASTE (Low Altitude Safety and Targeting

Enhancement) Control Panel
71
WARTHOG
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM Radio #1 Control Panel VHF Radio Volume Control Knob
VHF AM Radio Function Selector
A-10C
EMER FM: Emergency FM Guard Frequency

EMER AM: Emergency AM Guard Frequency
MAN: Manual Frequency
PRE: Preset Channel
UHF Radio Preset Channel Indicator
UHF Radio Test Display Button
UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials

VHF Radio Frequency Dials
AN/ARC-164 UHF Radio Control Panel
VHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials OFF

TR: Transmit-Receive
DF: VHF Direction Finder
UHF Radio Function Selector
OFF
MAIN
BOTH
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder
UHF Radio Tone Switch VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
UHF Radio Volume Control Knob UHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
UHF Radio Status Button

UHF Radio Squelch Switch
UHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
MNL: Manual
PRESET
GRD (Guard Frequency)
72
WARTHOG Speed Brake Emergency
Left Aileron Disengaged Light
Retraction Switch
A-10C
Left/Right Aileron Emergency

Disengage Control Switch
Pitch/Roll Trim Emergency

Override Control Switch
Flaps Emergency Retraction
Switch
Trim Emergency Pitch/Roll
Right Aileron Disengaged Light Control Switch
Left Elevator Disengaged Light
Left/Right Elevator Emergency

Disengage Control Switch
Manual Reversion Flight
Control System (MRFCS) Right Elevator Disengaged Light
FWD: Flight Controls Normal
AFT: Manual Reversion
73
WARTHOG
HM (Hot Microphone) Switch

A-10C
Intercom Volume Control

Audio Control Switches

• INT: Intercom Audio Power
• FM: VHF/FM Receiver Audio Power
INTERCOM Selector Switch • UHF: UHF Receiver Audio Power
Selects which radio your microphone is speaking to • VHF: VHF/AM Receiver Audio Power
INTERCOM Call Button • AIM: AIM-9 Sidewinder Seeker Tone Audio Power
• IFF: Interrogation Tone Audio Power
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Localizer/Marker
Beacon Tone Audio Power
• TCN: TACAN Tone Audio Power
74
WARTHOG
A-10C
IFF Antenna Control

Switch
Stall Warning System

Volume Control Knob
Stall Warning System

UHF Antenna PEAK PRFM Volume
Control Switch Control Knob
EGI HAVEQUICK Time
of Day Select Switch
(NOT FUNCTIONAL)
75
WARTHOG
A-10C
VHF Radio Volume Control Knob

AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM Radio #2
Control Panel
VHF FM Radio Function Selector
PRE: Preset Channel
VHF Radio Frequency Dials

OFF
KY-58 Secure Voice Control Panel VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
(not functional)
76
A-10C
Thunderstorm Light
Canopy Handle
77
WARTHOG
DTC (Data Transfer

A-10C
Cartridge) Access
Arm Ground Safety

Anti-G Suit Test Valve Override Switch
78
A-10C
79
Environmental Sensor Pitot
WARTHOG In an emergency situation during the pilot escape initiation, the seat moves up the rails leaving the aircraft. Pitot tubes
on the top of the seat near the parachute container are exposed to the airstream. Pitot and Static pressure inputs to the
environmental sensing unit act on the speed and altitude transducers to establish the safest mode for the pilot
involved, based on the speed and altitude environment
A-10C
80
WARTHOG
A-10C
AN/ALQ-131 ECM (Electronic

Countermeasure) Pod
AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT Pod
AAS-35 “Pave Penny” Laser Marked Target Receiver Pod
81
A-10C
GAU-8A 30 mm Gun
UHF/TACAN Antenna
82
WARTHOG
MXU-648 Travel Pod
AN/ASQ-T50 TCTS Pod Used to carry luggage
Used for training exercises. Records airspeed,
A-10C
attitude, and other flight parameters, whilst also

recording (simulated) missile launches and gun fire
TK600 External Fuel Tank

(600 gal)
BRU-42LS Triple Ejector Rack
83
WARTHOG
A-10C
Anti-Collision Lights Switch

If the External Lights Pinky Switch is set
Forward (Default Light Settings), the Taxi/Landing Light Switch
Anti-Collision switch will always spring
Position Lights switch back to OFF.
External Lights “Pinky” Switch

This switch can be seen as a “Master Lights” switch.
• FWD: Retains set illumination levels for formation lights, nose floodlights and nacelle
floodlights. Sets position lights to STEADY and disables anti-collision lights.
• MIDDLE: Turns off all external lights
• AFT: Lights are set according to lighting control panel settings.
Formation Lights
Brightness Control
Nose Floodlight & Nose

Illumination Switch
84
A-10C
Landing Light
Taxi Light
85
WARTHOG
Formation Light
Position Light (Green)
A-10C
Formation Light
Formation Light
Formation Light
Position Light (White)
Formation Light
Formation Light 86
Position Light (Red)
A-10C
Formation Light
Formation Light
87
WARTHOG
A-10C
Formation Light
Formation Light
Formation Light
Formation Light
88
WARTHOG
A-10C
Anti-Collision Light (Blinking) Anti-Collision Light (Blinking)

Anti-Collision Light (Blinking)
89
WARTHOG Used to help during aerial refueling
A-10C
Refueling Port Door

Open & Illuminated
Air Refueling Door Control Lever
Open/close refueling port slipway door
90
A-10C
Nose Floodlight
Nose Floodlight
91
WARTHOG
A-10C
HUD Night Mode

HUD Day Mode
HUD modes Selector Switch

Day/Night 92
WARTHOG
Rudders
A-10C
Elevator
Flaps Ailerons & Airbrakes
93
WARTHOG
A-10C
NIGHT VISION GOGGLES

ON/OFF: RSHIFT + H
BRIGHTNESS + : RCTRL + RSHIFT + H
BRIGHTNESS - : RALT + RSHIFT + H
94
A-10C
95
A-10C II
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES TANK KILLER
96
Expansion Only
A-10C II
97
Expansion Only
A-10C II
98
Expansion Only
A-10C II
99
Expansion Only
A-10C II
100
Expansion Only
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
TISL (Target Identification Set Laser) Panel – Removed

101
A-10C II
102
Expansion Only
Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Power Switch A-10C II Tank Killer
• ON (FWD): Power to the HMCS through the aircraft electrical power supply system Expansion Only
• OFF (MIDDLE): Power removed from the HMCS.
TANK KILLER
• BAT (AFT): Power to the HMCS using a battery stored in the panel. This allows it to be
tested without need of aircraft electrical power.
A-10C II
103
Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System)
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
104
ARC-210 V/UHF Radio Panel – Not Yet Available Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
105
A-10C
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE WARTHOG
106
PRE-START a
WARTHOG • You can request the ground crew to retract the boarding
ladder by calling the ground crew with the interphone.
c
a) Press “\” (Communication Menu)
b) Select Ground Crew by pressing “F8” b
A-10C
c) Select “Stow boarding ladder” by pressing “F4”
d Boarding Ladder
Extension Button
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE
Boarding Ladder 107

PRE-START 3
1. Battery - ON 2
WARTHOG
2. Inverter – STBY
5 1
3. Emergency Flood Lights – ON (if doing a night
operation)
A-10C
4. AC Generators – PWR
5. Hold Signal Lights Lamp Test switch and 8
confirm that caution light panel is functioning
6. Oxygen – ON
7. Hold OXY IND TEST switch and confirm that
warning message for LOW OXY is displayed
and audible
8. Hold Test Fuel Indicator switch to confirm fuel
indicator is working properly 4
9. Close Canopy by holding the canopy switch
DOWN (right click) or pressing “LCTRL+C”
7b
7a
9
7b 108
PRE-START A-10C Legacy
10. Set up radios Only
WARTHOG
• A-10C LEGACY:
a) Set VHF AM Radio #1 to TR (transmit-receive)
b) Set UHF radio to MAIN
A-10C
c) Set VHF FM Radio #2 to TR (transmit-receive).

d) Set proper radio frequencies as required.
10a
10b
10c
109
PRE-START A-10C II Tank Killer
10. Set up radios Expansion Only
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION:
TANK KILLER
• ARC-210 Radio not available yet.
A-10C II
110
PRE-START
WARTHOG 11. Boost pumps for MAIN and WING tanks - ON
A-10C
11
111
START PROCEDURE SUMMARY FUEL
WARTHOG
IGNITION/STARTER
A-10C
ELECTRICAL POWER
APU GENERATOR AIR PRESSURE

BATTERY SWITCH ON APU
FUEL PUMPS ON AUXILIARY
APU START SWITCH POWER UNIT APU BLEED AIR
FUEL PUMPS ON
FUEL VALVE
THROTTLE AT IDLE
ENGINE START
THROTTLE AT IDLE STARTER/IGNITER
112
APU START APU Exhaust Gas Temperature (deg C)
12. APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) switch – START
WARTHOG
13. Wait until APU RPM reaches 100 %, then set APU
Generator switch – ON.
A-10C
Note: The APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) generator

supplies electrical power to the engine, and the APU
bleed air will drive the engine starter.
13a
13b
13 APU RPM (%)

13c
12
113
ENGINE START 20
14. Verify both Engine Operation switches are in NORM position
WARTHOG
15. Crank up left engine by moving left throttle from OFF to IDLE (RALT+HOME). This
will automatically initiate a left engine start with the automatic ignition. Once
throttle is moved to IDLE, the DC fuel boost pumps will activate to feed that engine.
A-10C
• Note: On Warthog Throttle, you need to physically raise/pull up the

throttle.
16. During start, ENG START CYCLE indication will be visible.
17. Confirm oil pressure increases during start. Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT)
will spike at 900 °C but will stabilize between 275 and 865 °C.
18. Wait until engine spools up to a stabilized core RPM of 56 % when idling on the 17
ground. Monitor Left Hydraulic system pressure build-up, which should normalize
between 2,800 and 3,350 PSI.
18
19. When engine reaches IDLE RPM, hydraulic pumps kick in and oil pressure has
stabilized, L-GEN, L-HYD PRESS and L-ENG OIL PRESS cautions will extinguish.
20. When Master Caution warning sound is heard, click on “MASTER CAUTION” switch.
16 L-HYD PRESS
Caution
18
14
L-ENG OIL 15 IDLE POSITION

PRESS Caution 19
19
L-GEN Caution
19 17
114
OFF POSITION
ENGINE START
21. Crank up right engine by moving right throttle from
WARTHOG
OFF to IDLE (RCTRL +HOME). Wait until engine
spools up to IDLE settings as shown previously. 21b
22. APU Generator – OFF/RESET
A-10C
23. APU switch – OFF
23
22
21d
21b IDLE POSITION
OFF POSITION
115
21c 21a
POST-START
24. Set Pitot Heat Switch – ON (FWD)
WARTHOG
25. Set CDU (Control Display Unit) switch – ON
26. Set EGI (Embedded GPS-INS) switch – ON
27. Once EGI switch is ON, navigation system alignment
A-10C
will start and take approx. 4 minutes. The alignment

status can be monitored on the CDU – ALIGN sub-
page, but the MFCDs are not powered yet. We will
come back to it later.
28. Uncage Standby Attitude Indicator (SAI)
29. Turn ON left and right MFCD (Multi-Function Color
Display) screens by left-clicking twice on each power 29
switch. 28
30. Set CICU (Central Interface Control Unit) switch – ON.
The MFCDs will turn to blue.
31. Set JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) switch – ON
• JTRS Powers Situational Awareness Datalink
(SADL), which helps you to identify and see

friendly/enemy forces on your monitors
25 26
24 31
30a
30b
116
POST-START
32. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – TEST
WARTHOG
(middle position)
33. Press “ENT” on the UFC (Up Front Controller) to engage Preflight 33b
BIT
A-10C
• This will run an automated BIT (Built-In Test), which will

take about 1 minute. The IFFCC does all these fancy
calculations for weapon release, attitude control and HUD
indications.
34. Once BIT is complete, press “ENT” on the UFC to exit the
PREFLIGHT BIT menu.
35. Scroll down HUD menus using the “SEL” button and select EXIT by 34
pressing the “ENT” button on the UFC.
36. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – ON (UP
position)
37. Pitch and Yaw SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches – ON
38. Hold TAKEOFF TRIM switch for 1-2 seconds. Pressing this button
will automatically set all trim tabs to neutral, takeoff settings. 37 38

When all trim tabs have been set to the proper setting, the takeoff
trim light above the button will light and indicate TAKEOFF TRIM
32
33a
36
35b 35a
117
POST-START
39. Once you have a “DTS UPLOAD” page appear on your MFCD (Data Transfer System Upload), press the OSB (“Option Selection Button” on side of the screen) next to “Load All”. This
WARTHOG
will load the DTS (Data Transfer System) cartridge in your flight computer, which stocks your mission waypoints, weapon data, bullseye data and other navigation data set up from the
mission editor.
• NOTE: Data transfer will take about 15 seconds
A-10C
40. Once DTS cartridge is loaded, the white DSMS, INVT and CMBT cautions will disappear and asterisks will appear next to every menu (* means loaded).
39
40
118
POST-START
41. Select the OSB next to “CDU” (Control Display Unit) on the
WARTHOG
right MFCD to display EGI (Embedded GPS-INS) Alignment
data on this screen.
• Once the alignment status timer goes to “T = 4.0 0.8”,
A-10C
the EGI is aligned. EGI Alignment Status

42. Set STEERPOINT selector to FLIGHT PLAN. This will allow you
to use waypoints on your HUD and TAD to navigate. 41c
43. On the right MFCD where CDU data is displayed, select NAV 30
mode by pressing the OSB next to the NAV menu. Once NAV
mode is selected, an asterisk will appear next to it.
41a
41b
EGI Alignment Complete

41d
42
43
119
POST-START
44. Select the OSB next to “TAD” (Tactical Awareness Display) on
WARTHOG
the left MFCD to display TAD data on this screen.
45. Set CMS (Countermeasures) mode to “MAN”
46. Set MWS (Missile Warning System), JMR (Electronic
A-10C
Countermeasures Jammer), RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) and

DISP (Countermeasure Dispenser) switches ON.
47. Engage Nosewheel Steering (pinky switch on HOTAS stick). You
can also use the “INSERT” key.
47 Nosewheel Steering Button

45
44 46
120
POST-START
48. Set Anti-Skid Switch – ON 48
WARTHOG
49. Select EGI (Embedded GPS Inertial Navigation System) navigation mode.
50. Set EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) Switch – ARMED
51. Set RDR ALTM (Radar Altimeter) Switch – NORMAL
A-10C
52. Arm Ejection Seat (Lever DOWN). SEAT NOT ARMED caution should disappear.
53. Check your Caution Panel: any message displayed on it will tell you if you forgot
something.
49
52a
50
51
52b
52b
52a
53
121
POST-START A-10C II Tank Killer
54. Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Power Switch – ON (FWD) Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
54
122
PRE-FLIGHT – WHAT YOU NEED TO DO, AND WHY IT MATTERS
WARTHOG
Some people start their aircraft and are up in the air 10 minutes later.
A-10C
Some people start their aircraft and are up in the air 1 hour later.
It’s not always a matter of how “quickly” you can go through the start-up procedure. It is mostly a matter of flying your aircraft “smartly”. The A-10C is an incredibly
complex module, and it is no surprise that the DCS manual is more than 650 pages long. This guide will not teach you everything a real life A-10C pilot does: it would
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF
probably take much more than 1000 pages and months to learn. This guide is meant to be a quick n’ dirty tutorial to start the machine, communicate and operate with
other players, fly and destroy targets while staying alive. You will not learn how to use every bomb. You will not learn how to use advanced functionalities of the CDU. You
will not learn every tactic, every manoeuver, every emergency procedure… What you’ll learn is the basics that allow you to build a solid knowledge basis that will allow
you to expand upon it by reading the manual.
Many new pilots complain about the length of the start-up procedure and think that doing the pre-flight checks we’re about to do is a huge waste of time since you
spend 5 to 10 more minutes on the ground instead of flying. In all honesty, I thought that way too at the beginning. I wanted action, and I just thought that firing up the
Hog and taking off as quickly as possible was the most efficient way to go find some trouble. Experience taught me that it is better to spend 5 additional minutes on the
ground to prepare your systems in a relaxed environment than to spend 10 minutes in the air in a stressful situation to do the same task. You are much more likely to
make mistakes and start panicking when you are in a stressful situation, just like pilots in real life. Be structured, be prepared, and you will be amazed to realize how
much more efficient you can be.
One of the key things I tell new guys is to concentrate on your systems when you are on the ground and to concentrate on flying when you are in the air. One of the
biggest challenges for modern aircraft is the workload: it is critical to manage this workload properly if you do not want to be overwhelmed by it. Set up your systems
properly on the ground so you don’t have to worry about them in the air.
Here are the things you can do on the ground that will save you precious time and brain cells:
1. Identify yourself on the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) and identify your wingmen
2. Programming your weapons using the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System)
3. Setting up your countermeasure programs (or simply use a preset program that suits your needs)
4. Set up your radio frequencies (usually given through mission briefing)
5. Get to know your flight plan in advance (consult waypoints/steerpoints on your TAD)
Example of full mission in multiplayer: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zRgoUqfiO5I 123

PRE-FLIGHT – IDENTIFYING YOURSELF ON THE TAD
WARTHOG
The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) allows you to know where you are, and who is next to you.
A-10C
In a single-player mission, you are unlikely to fully appreciate the functionality behind the TAD. A multiplayer session allows you to
better understand why the TAD is so useful and how it should be used to give you information that is both precise, concise and
relevant. A common practice to do when your TAD is loaded is to set your own ID. You have both a GROUP ID and a personal OWN
ID. You don’t really need to touch the GROUP ID (apart from situations where there are way too many planes in a same sector,
which is unlikely to happen in DCS), but setting up your OWN ID is useful for your wingman. Why? Because if you set your own ID,
all members with your same GROUP ID will be able to see your OWN ID pop up on their TAD. For instance, if I set my OWN ID to
“19” and my GROUP ID to “1”, every person in GROUP ID #1 will see an icon with “19” pop on their TAD. This way, they can know
where I am. They can even send me messages, target locations and track my position using the HUD and their flight computers!
To set up your own ID:
1. Click on “NET” OSB on your TAD.
2. Enter your desired ID number on your UFC (Up Front Controller) 2
3. Press the “OWN ID” OSB to set your OWN ID to the number you just entered through the UFC.
4. You can go back to the TAD by clicking the “TAD” OSB.
4
3
1b
1a
124
PRE-FLIGHT – DSMS, OR HOW TO MANAGE YOUR BOMBS, MISSILES AND SHIT
WARTHOG
When you spawn, you typically have a set of various weapons mounted on your wing pylons. The reality is that more often than not, you will want to change your loadout
and set it to your own liking.
A-10C
This is where the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System), also nicknamed “DIZMAS” comes into play. Most WWII/Korea/Vietnam era weapons were relatively simple
since most of the aiming was done manually or with gyro-assisted gunsights. However, with the coming age of computers, dropping bombs and guiding missiles with pin-
point accuracy became possible. Ground strikes became much more precise, but such complexity required an interface for the pilot to work with. In order to manage
“smart” bombs and missiles, the DSMS was created to help the pilot to program them: how many are launched, how they behave, how and when they explode, etc.
It is easy to feel overwhelmed by the DSMS page at first. You can customize pretty much anything you could think of on any kind of ordnance you are carrying. No need to
panic yet: there is no way in hell you will be able to remember every single procedure by heart. We will simply explore together how the Dizmas works, so you can
operate it by yourself and know what you are doing… without ever needing to read this godawful wall of text ever again. Deal?
First, we will assume that you are starting your mission from scratch and that you load your weapons manually using “\” and the Ground Crew. The DSMS cannot “guess”
if you changed your weapon loadout or not, so you need to tell the computer to check or re-check what ordnance is loaded.
NOTE: You can avoid having to re-load your DSMS by simply spawning, choosing your desired loadout, and only then proceed with the start-up procedure.
125
WRONG DSMS LOADOUT GOOD DSMS LOADOUT
HOW TO RELOAD DSMS
WARTHOG
A-10C
3
1 2 4
2) Click and hold “MSG” OSB until you see 3) Click on “Load” OSB on the right menus
1) Click on “CDU” menu OSB on right MFCD 4) Click on lower “MSG” OSB. OSB will change from “MSG” to “LOAD”.
the menus appear next to the right OSBs.
6) Click on “LOAD ALL” OSB on the right to reload all DSMS stations. 126
5) Click on the new lower “LOAD” OSB menu.
Reload is complete when asterisks appear next to every menu.
HOW TO MODIFY 3
WARTHOG
WEAPON PROFILES 2 4
CURSOR
1. From the MAIN DSMS menu, select “PROF” OSB. 7
A-10C
2. Move green cursor using the OSBs to the left to cycle

through weapon profiles.
3. Once green cursor is next to desired weapon profile,
select “VIEW PRO” OSB to open profile

2
settings/options.
4. Select appropriate firing mode (Ripple Single is
recommended) and choose what setting on the right 6
OSB row you want to modify.
5. Using the UFC scratch pad, enter in the HUD the new
value for the setting you want to modify (ex: “1” for
RIPPLE QUANTITY)
6. Select appropriate OSB for the setting you want to NOTE: You can click “CHANGE SETTINGS” to
change (ex: “RIP QTY”). access additional weapon release settings.
7. Click “Save” OSB to save profile once all settings are
OK.
1
NOTE: In other words, you modify a profile setting by
entering the new setting value from the scratch pad
first, and THEN you select the setting you want to
apply this value to. Note that some settings like
CCRP/CCIP weapon release mode do not require user
input from UFC scratch pad: you can just click the OSB NUMBERS ENTERED FROM UFC
next to the parameter to toggle it.
“CLEAR” UFC IF YOU MADE A MISTAKE OR 127

GET THE “ERR” NOTICE ON HUD.
MISSION LOADOUT RECOMMENDED WEAPON LOADOUT
WARTHOG
STATION STORE DESCRIPTION
A-10C
1 AN/ALQ-131 ECM JAMMER POD Electronic Countermeasures

ESSENTIAL Jammer Pod
2 7 x 2.75 in M-151 Rockets Unguided Rocket Pod

3 2 x AGM-65D MAVERICK Air-to-Ground Missile 125 lbs

D variant: Infrared Seeker
4 3 x MK-82 General Purpose Unguided Bomb
5 1 x GBU-38 Guided Bomb (JDAM)
6 EMPTY
7 1 x GBU-38 Guided Bomb (JDAM)
8 3 x MK82 General Purpose Unguided Bomb
9 2 x AGM-65H MAVERICK Air-to-Ground Missile 125 lbs

H variant: Electro-Optical Seeker
ESSENTIAL 10 AN/AAQ-28 LITENING POD Targeting Pod (TGP)
11 2 x AIM-9M SIDEWINDER Air-to-Air Missile
GUN 1150 rounds GAU-8 30 MM GUN

Combat Mix
FLARE DISPENSER 120 Disrupts IR heat-seeking missiles
CHAFF DISPENSER 240 Disrupts semi-active radar

homing missiles
FUEL 75 %
128
TAXI Anti-Skid Engaged
WARTHOG Nosewheel Steering Engaged
1. Ensure ANTI-SKID is on.
2. Ensure Nosewheel Steering is ON (keyboard binding:
A-10C
“INSERT”).
3. Move throttles forward slowly as required to start
forward movement
4. Use the rudder pedals to steer the aircraft left and right;
do not use differential braking to steer.

5. Taxi speed should be between 15 and 25 knots.
6. While taxiing, the canopy should never be opened or
closed while turning.
7. Use the toe brakes to slow and stop the aircraft.
129
TAKEOFF
WARTHOG
1. Line up on the runway
2. Make sure your Pitot Heat is ON during cold conditions.
A-10C
3. Press the TAKEOFF TRIM switch to ensure you are trimmed for takeoff.
4. Set flaps for takeoff (MVR middle position, 7 deg) and ensure speedbrakes are retracted.
4
4

130
TAKEOFF
WARTHOG
5. Hold down brakes, MAX throttle.
6. Release brakes and start rolling.
A-10C
7. Disengage Nosewheel Steering (OFF) when you reach 70 kts.

8. Rotate at 135 kts. Set Landing Gear Lever UP and set Flaps UP.
9. Start climbing at a 10 deg AoA (Angle of Attack) angle. Do not
yank back on the stick to get airborne: let it fly off the runway by
itself.
131
A-10C
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF WARTHOG
TAKEOFF
132
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
1. Initial Approach
A-10C
• Maintain altitude of 2000 ft

• Keep airspeed between 250-300 kts
2. Downwind leg
• Keep airspeed between 200-250 kts
3. Base Leg
• Maintain airspeed of 150 kts
4. Before Glide Path Final Approach
• Extend Airbrakes (40 %)
• Lower Landing Gear
• Flaps DOWN (fully extended)
5. On Glide Path Final Approach
• -500 ft/min descent rate
6. Touchdown by letting yourself glide on the runway.
No need to flare.
PART 6 – LANDING
133
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING
134
WARTHOG
A-10C

The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated
green and yellow symbols.
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and
PART 6 – LANDING
low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.

Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is
down.
135
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING
136
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING
137
WARTHOG
GENERAL ELECTRIC TF-34 ENGINE
The A-10C is powered by General Electric TF-34-GE-100A engine. The TF-34 is a high-bypass turbofan that generates 85% of its thrust with bypass air. To do so, it uses a
A-10C
single-stage bypass fan and a 14-stage axial flow compressor. Because the vast majority of thrust is generated by the bypass fan, the best indication of thrust in the cockpit is
from the fan speed indicators. Bleed air can be siphoned from the fan to power additional systems.
Each engine is housed in a nacelle

with maintenance doors that provide
easy access. At maximum thrust,
each engine produces 8,900 pounds
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
of standard thrust at sea level on a

standard day.
Although there has long been talk

about upgrading the A-10 engines,
this has yet to actually happen. As
such, the A-10 is not a speed demon,
but it does have reliable, fuel
economic and durable engines in its
current form.
From engine IDLE to MAX takes

approximately 10 seconds at sea
level. Thrust (amount of fuel supplied
to the engines) is governed by the
two throttle levers in the cockpit.
138
WARTHOG
GENERAL ELECTRIC TF-34 ENGINE
The TF-34-GE-100A engines of the A-10C are placed in a rather
A-10C
unusual configuration: they are mounted high on the rear fuselage

between the wings and the rear stabilizers. The vertical stabs provide
additional protection against small arms fire: it is an intelligent
design choice when you consider the fact that the A-10C is a ground-
pounder and sometimes has to go pretty close to provide accurate
close air support (CAS) to the troops on the ground.
Some of the advantages are quite interesting:
• The high mounting reduces the likelihood of the engines

ingesting Foreign Object Debris (FOD) when operating from
rough, forward bases in war-time.
• Engines can remain running when aircraft is being rearmed and
refueled. This leads to faster mission turn-around.
• Ease of servicing the engines.
• Reduced IR signature from below due to the shielding of the
horizontal stabilizer.
139
WARTHOG
ENGINE CONTROLS & PARAMETERS
Here is an overview of engine parameters.
A-10C
Engine Flow Switches

Engine ITT: Interstage Engine Throttles
Engine Core (Compressor) NORM: No exceeding ITT is possible
Turbine Temperature (deg C) OVERRIDE: Exceeding ITT is possible
Speed (%RPM) Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)

(x100 lbs/hour) Engine Operation Switches
IGN: Manual Engine Ignition
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI)
NORM: Normal Engine Ignition
MOTOR: Purge Engine Combustion Chamber 140
WARTHOG
APU (AUXILIARY POWER UNIT)
Located in the rear fuselage between the engine mounts is the APU (Auxiliary
A-10C
Power Unit).
The APU is a small engine in itself and draws fuel to run. When running, the
APU supplies compressed air to turn the compressor fans to start the engines.
The APU also drives an electrical generator and a hydraulic pump.
Once both engines are started and their generators enabled, the APU and APU
generator can be shut down. You would only need to use the APU again in case
of an engine re-start.
APU Exhaust
APU Generator Switch
APU EGT (Exhaust Gas

Temperature) Indicator (deg C)
APU Starter Switch

APU (Auxiliary Power
(Auxiliary Power Unit) 141
Unit) RPM (%)
Engine ITT: Interstage
Engine Core (Compressor)
ENGINE & APU LIMITS Turbine Temperature (deg C)
Speed (%RPM)
WARTHOG Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)
Here is an overview of engine parameters limits as per the Eagle Dynamics user
A-10C
manual.
Engine Oil Pressure:

• Maximum: 95 psi
• Normal IDLE range: 55 to 85 psi
• Acceptable when core RPM is 85 %: 40 to 55 psi
• Minimum Pressure: 40 psi
Engine Core Speed:

• Engine operation should not exceed 102 %
• Engine operation between 100 and 102 % should not exceed 3 seconds
• Normal operating range should be between 56 and 98 %
Engine Fan Speed:

• Normal operation is approx 82 % at takeoff
Engine ITT (Interstage Turbine Temperature):

• Stabilized temperature above 865 deg C indicates engine malfunction
• A short period at 900 deg C is possible during engine start
• Normal operating range is between 275 and 865 deg C
Engine Fuel Flow:

• Normal fuel flow is between 1500 and 410 pph (lbs per hour)
APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature): (x100 lbs/hour)
• Normal operation between 200 and 715 deg C Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI)
• Maximum at engine start for two seconds is 760 deg C APU (Auxiliary Power APU EGT (Exhaust Gas
Unit) RPM (%) Temperature) Indicator (deg C)
APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) RPM:
• Normal operation at 100 %
• Maximum operation at 110 %
• Engine start minimum of 60 %
142
WARTHOG
ENGINE FIRE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
1. An engine fire is detected when one of the T-shaped fire handles illuminate.
A-10C
2. Reduce power to affected engine and monitor if the fire light goes out.
3. Set the throttle of the affected engine to OFF (RALT+END for left engine, or RCTRL+END for right engine).
4. Pull the fire handle of the affected engine (or APU if APU fire is detected) to close its respective fuel shutoff valve.
5. Set the Fire Extinguisher Agent Discharge switch either left or right (there are two extinguisher agent bottles).
6. Keep in mind that using the fire extinguisher chemical agent may very well prevent the engine from being restarted.
Right Engine Fire

1
Handle Illuminated
143
5
WARTHOG
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE – APU-ASSISTED
5
Remember you can't start your engines via APU (Auxiliary Power Unit)
A-10C
above 18000 ft. To perform an APU-assisted engine restart:

8a
1. Move the inoperative engine throttle to the OFF position.
2. Observe that the shut down engine ITT value cools down rapidly.
3. Aircraft altitude should be below 20,000 ft MSL and increase airspeed.
4. When below 15,000 ft MSL, move the APU power switch to the START
position. Wait until APU RPM reaches 100 %.
5. Move the still operating throttle to MAX.

6. Set the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to the MOTOR
setting (AFT).
7. When affected engine ITT is below 100 °C and altitude below 15,000 ft
MSL, restart the affected engine by moving the throttle from OFF to 4
IDLE (RALT+HOME for left engine, or RCTRL+HOME for right engine). 6
8. Engine dry motoring will start (core speed will increase to 20-30%). To
allow engine ignition and fuel flow, move the Engine Operate switch of
the affected engine back to the NORM position.
9. If engine restart is successful, reengage the SAS switches and set engine 8b
operate switch back to NORM. 1
2 7
8c
144
WARTHOG
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE – WINDMILLING
A “windmilling” engine start is an engine start performed with air flow driving the
A-10C
engine compressor blades. Using a windmill start will take 6,000 to 8,000 ft to
complete because it requires a steep dive of at least 30-degrees. Given the altitude
requirement, this is not an option when below 10,000 ft AGL. To perform a windmill
engine restart:
1. Place the aircraft in a 30-degree dive to maximize airspeed during the dive.
2. Set the Bleed Air switch to OFF.
3. Set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED. This will link the two fuel systems and
allow boost pumps to feed both engines.
4. Once ITT of affected engine is below 150 °C, set both throttles to MAX.
5. Set and hold the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to IGN until engine 5b
ignition occurs.
6. Once engine is operating, move Engine Operate switch back to NORM. 4 5a
7. Move Crossfeed switch to OFF.
8. Set Bleed Air switch to ON.
Right Engine Shut Down
3
145
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The fuel storage system for the A-10C consists of left and right internal wing tanks and right and left fuselage tanks. The right side fuel tanks feed the right engine and the left
A-10C
side tanks feed the left engine and APU. To provide fuel pressure, each tank has a co-located boost pump. Due to differing boost pump pressures, the wing tanks will
automatically empty before the fuselage tanks. Wing and Fuselage tanks are self-sealing and filled with a flexible foam to prevent a fuel tank explosion.
For negative G flight, the A-10C has collector tanks that will supply the engines with sufficient fuel for 10 seconds of operation at MAX power. If you fly at negative G for more
than 10 seconds, you risk the engines shutting down due to lack of fuel supply.
Fuselage (Main) Fuel Tanks

Internal Tank Capacity: Left Main: 3475 lbs (510 gal)
11087 lbs (1630 gal) Right Main: 3475 lbs (510 gal)
Left Fuel System Right Fuel System
Quantity Indicator Quantity Indicator
(x1000 lbs) (x1000 lbs)
Wing Fuel Tank

Left Wing: 2115 lbs (310 gal)
Total Fuel Quantity Indicator

(x1000 lbs)
Wing Fuel Tank

Right Wing: 2115 lbs (310 gal)
Fuel Quantity Display Selector 146Test Switch
Fuel Indicator
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Additionally, the aircraft can be loaded with up to three 600 gallon external fuel tanks (TK600 external store). Fuel readings on
A-10C
external tanks require the FUEL DISPLAY SEL switch to be set to either EXT WING or EXT CTR depending on where the fuel tanks
are installed.
The TK600 external fuel tanks can be carried on stations 4, 6 and 8. The fuel tank is unarmored and has no self-sealing capability.
As such, this fuel tank is only carried during ferry missions and is never flown with in combat.
To jettison external tanks, see the “Jettison Ordnance” tutorial sub-section in the Weapons section.
TK600 External Fuel Tanks

(4080 lbs / 600 gal each)
Fuel Quantity Display Selector
147
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW Signal Amplifier Switch
(not functional)
Fuselage EXT TKS Switch
Transfer fuel from external fuselage tank
A-10C

Used to help during aerial refueling
Wing EXT TKS Switch
Transfers fuel from external wing tanks
Fuel Line Check Button
Fuel Crossfeed Switch (not functional)
Although the A-10C fuel system is designed with two parallel fuel
systems, setting the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED will link the two
fuel systems and allow the boost pumps to feed both engines. If the
Crossfeed switch is set to OFF, both fuel systems are isolated. You
would most often use Crossfeed when one of the boost pumps fails.
Internal Fuel Tank Gate Open/Close Air Refueling Door Control Lever
Linking the left and right main fuel tanks is a transfer valve that may be Open/close refueling port slipway door
opened by setting the TK GATE switch to the OPEN position. Setting this
switch to CLOSE will isolate the two tanks from each other. Generally you
will want to keep this switch disabled as being enabled can lead to fuel
center of gravity problems
Wing Fuel Tank Boost

Fill Wing Fuel Tank Disable
Pump Switches To disable the filling of the wing internal tanks (due to
battle damage for instance), you can elect to disable
filling of a selected tank. These switches act like circuit
Main Fuel Tank Boost
breakers in that when you select them they are pulled
Pump Switches out and the selected tank will be disabled for refill
Fill Main Fuel Tank Disable

To disable the filling of main internal tanks (due to battle damage for
instance), you can elect to disable filling of a selected tank. These
switches act like circuit breakers in that when you select them they are
pulled out and the selected tank will be disabled for refill
148
THE MYSTERY OF THE HUD AND MULTI-FUNCTION COLOR DISPLAYS
WARTHOG
The MFCDs (Multifunction Color Display) often seem to confuse new pilots. It is hard to go from a prop plane to an aircraft that works just like a
A-10C
computer, isn’t it? So many different programs, so many switches, so many settings… It is easy to feel at a loss when you have no idea what is under
the hood.
The trick in understanding how the HUD and MFCDs work is to think of them like computer monitors. In fact, it works almost exactly like a computer.
While you are having Google Chrome, Itunes, Word and other programs running simultaneously on a single screen, you can switch between different
windows, right? Well, this time you’re flying an A-10C, not a PC or a Mac. The TAD, TGP, MAV, CDU and DSMS are all different systems that can run at
the same time (just like the computer programs and apps a la Candy Crush that you use in your everyday life). The MFCDs can only “display” two
system interfaces at once, though… it kind of makes sense since you only have two screens, doesn’t it? Just like in a computer, you can choose what
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS
you want to show on any screen.

A computer screen is pretty, but it is useless if you
cannot use it. This is why you have a mouse and
keyboard. However, the A-10C does not have a
mouse and keyboard: instead, it has sets of grey
OSBs (Option Select Button) around each MFCD, a
UFC (Up Front Controller) on your front dash,
another keyboard next to your CDU (Control
Display Unit) on the right console and it has a
HOTAS (Hand On Throttle-and-Stick), which are the
fancy buttons on your joystick and throttle.
With the HOTAS, UFC, CDU keyboard and OSBs,

you can easily control your systems. It’s like having
an old Nintendo 64 controller: if you want to play,
you need to know how to use it properly.
149
THE MYSTERY OF THE HUD AND MULTI-FUNCTION COLOR DISPLAYS
WARTHOG
A-10C
SCREENS
SCREEN
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLERS
150
HOTAS: HOW TO USE IT
WARTHOG
The philosophy of concept of “Hands on Throttle-and-Stick” (HOTAS) is that you can
access the majority of your systems by keeping on hands on your throttle and your
A-10C
joystick 99 % of the time.
These controls are ESSENTIAL to remember!
• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System

• Typically used to lock on targets and set your SPI…
• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch
• Used to zoom in/out, cycle through waypoints or weapons…
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
• COOLIE HAT
• Controls DSMS (what weapons you want to use), swaps MFCD screens (like
an ALT+TAB), lets you pick a Sensor of Interest (SOI), etc…
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• CHINA HAT
• Set different FOV (field of view) angles and slave all sensors to your SPI
(your cameras and missiles will be looking at where you tell them to look,
like a target)
Based on what sensor is selected (SOI), these switches will do different things.
Not only do these switches do different things based on your Sensor of Interest, but
they also do different things based on how long you hold the switch.
For example, TMS UP LONG means that you press the TMS switch UP for 1 to 3
seconds. DMS RIGHT SHORT means that you press the DMS switch RIGHT for a very
short duration of time (less than 1 second), or like a simple button press.
151
A-10C Legacy
HOTAS STICK CONTROLS SUMMARY (A-10C LEGACY) Only
WARTHOG
A-10C
152
A-10C Legacy
HOTAS THROTTLE CONTROLS SUMMARY (A-10C LEGACY) Only
WARTHOG
A-10C
153
HOTAS STICK CONTROLS SUMMARY (A-10C II TANK KILLER) Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
154
HOTAS THROTTLE CONTROLS SUMMARY (A-10C II TANK KILLER) Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
HOTAS Commands - Throttle
Selected SOI
Switch Action
TAD TGP HUD A/A MAV HMCS HMCS B/S MSG
A-10C II
Fwd Transmit Front Radio (Rotary = VHF)

Mic Aft Transmit Aft Radio (Rotary = Anything)
Switch Up No Transmit (Rotary = Anything)
Down UHF
Fwd Retract Speedbrakes
Speed
Aft Extend Speedbrakes
Brake
Center Hold Speedbrakes Position
MAV
Fwd TGP FLIR Black Hot Dark/Cold TGP FLIR Black Hot
Light/Hot
MAV
Boat Aft TGP FLIR White Hot Light/Hot TGP FLIR White Hot
Switch Dark/Cold
Boresight
Forced
Center TGP CCD TGP CCD
Correlation
Auto
FOV TGP FOV
MAV Uncage/
FOV Change FOV Change -
Video/ Consent to
Fwd Toggle LSS FOV Change LSS FOV
MAV SOI Self-Track
Short Change Change
China Long Slave All to SPI
Hat
Recage/ Recage/ Reset/Cage
Reset LSS Reset/Cage
Short Manual Manual HDC to
Aft Cursor Toggle TDC to TVV
Sequence Sequence Crosshair
Long Slave TGP to Current Steerpoint
Forward Position Lights to DimStaedy / Strobes OFF
Pinky
Aft Exterior Lights per Lighting Panel
Switch
Center Black Out All Exterior Lights
Left De- Short LAAP (Low Altitude Autopilot)
Throt Btn press Long Image Capture
Slew TAD Slew Slew
Slew/ Slew Slew TGP Slew TDC Slew AIM-9 Slew MAV Slew HDC
Cursor Boresight Cursor
Track
Depress
Short HUD as SOI
Up
Long Message Quick Look
Short HMCS as SOI
Down
Coolie Long Display DSMS Weapon Status Page & Selected Profile
Switch Short Cycle Left MFCD Page
Left
Long Left MFCD as SOI
Short Cycle Right MFCD Page
155
Right
Long Right MFCD as SOI
WARTHOG
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Sensors • 4 – Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) – A-10C II Tank Killer Only
A-10C
• 1.1 – Introduction to Sensors • 4.1 – Introduction

• 1.2 – Sensors Display Selection (SOI, SPI) • 4.2 – HMCS Power-Up & Setup
• 1.3 – HUD (Heads-Up Display) & TDC • 4.3 – HMCS Symbology
• 1.4 – TISL (Target Identification Set, Laser) • 4.3.1 – Basic HMD Symbology
• 4.3.2 – Navigation HMD Symbology
• 2 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod • 4.3.3 – Unit HMD Symbology
• 2.1 – Introduction • 4.3.4 – Designation HMD Symbology
• 2.2 – Displays • 4.3.5 – Targeting Pod HMD Symbology
• 2.3 – Controls • 4.4 – HMCS Controls
• 2.4 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure • 4.5 – HMCS Functions
• 2.5 – Slaving TGP to a Steerpoint • 4.5.1 – Hooking HMD Symbols
• 2.6 – Boresight Function • 4.5.2 – Creating a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) via HMCS
• 2.7 – Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode • 4.5.3 – Targeting Pod Slaving to LOS (Line-of-Sight) via HMCS
• 2.8 – Laser Pointer/Marker • 4.5.4 – Markpoint Creation via HMCS
• 3 - AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile

• 3.1 – Displays
• 3.2 – Controls
PART 9 – SENSORS
156
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG 1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
The A-10C Warthog is by definition one of the most versatile aircraft when it comes to armament and sensors. Here is an overview of how the Warthog can “see” the outside world.
A-10C
• AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod: Targeting system developed to provide precision strike capability. Target designation is achieved by using a laser designator/range finder or an infrared
laser marker, which can be created by the pod itself. It is also capable of displaying a FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) thermal imagery.
• AMG-65 IR Maverick Seeker Head feed: Maverick air-to-ground missiles have seeker heads that have video capability and that can be used as supplemental sensors.
PART 9 – SENSORS
LITENING Targeting Pod AGM-65

Maverick
157
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG 1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
This section will introduce you to various sensors. You will get the « what », but the « how » will be demonstrated later in the Weapons section since the use and application of sensors will make
A-10C
more sense to you once you start using them for a specific purpose. Just keep in mind that your sensors can be monitored from the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and various displays, while they can be
operated from the HOTAS stick and throttle.
DMS (Data
Management Switch)
TMS (Target Management
System) Switch
TGP (Targeting Pod) Page
MAV (Maverick) Page
PART 9 – SENSORS
Boat Switch
Slew Control Switch

China Hat Switch
158
Coolie Hat Switch
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG 1.2 – SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
You will hear these terms all the time: SOI, which means “Sensor of Interest” and SPI, which means “Sensor Point of
A-10C
Interest”.
The A-10C can “see” in many ways: you can look through the canopy, but you can also use different sensors like the TGP
(Targeting Pod), the MAV (Maverick Air-to-Ground missile), the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) or even the HUD (Heads Up
Display). They are all different sensors that can be controlled with the different “controls” we spoke about earlier... like the
HOTAS. Making a sensor SOI basically means that you take control of this sensor. In “computer terms”, it is the equivalent of
using Alt-Tab to select which window you want to use your mouse and keyboard in. If you want to control the infrared camera
embedded in your TGP, you need to select the TGP by “making it your SOI”.
A SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), on the other hand, is where your

SOI (the Sensor of Interest that you are currently controlling) is HUD SOI Asterisk
pointing. It is basically your mouse’s cursor. In other words, you
use a SPI to lock on targets and throw shit at it that blows up. In
order to use a weapon, the procedure is always the same: choose a SPI Sensor Indicator
Sensor of Interest (SOI) like your TGP, your HUD or a MAVerick TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
Missile’s seeker head, and once you have made this sensor your
SOI, control your SPI (camera “cursor”), move it on a target, slave
your sensors to this SPI, lock your target and fire your weapons
according to the procedures elaborated in the WEAPONS part of NOT SOI Indicates that this page
this guide. is not the Sensor of Interest
PART 9 – SENSORS
Green Square: TGP Page is

SOI (Sensor of Interest)
159
1 – SENSORS
The Coolie Hat Switch is used to determine a SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C
As an example, if we have the TGP page on the left MFCD and the Maverick Page on the right MFCD and we want to set the TGP page as the
Sensor of Interest (SOI):
• Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (LEFT since we have the TGP page on the left
MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
To set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI, press the Coolie Hat Switch UP.
Coolie Hat Switch

PART 9 – SENSORS

160
1 – SENSORS TMS (Target Management System) Switch
The Target Management Switch (TMS) is used to create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) based on what sensor is
A-10C
the Sensor of Interest.

The China Hat Switch is used to slave sensors like the Targeting Pod to the SPI.

• FWD LONG: Creates SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT LONG: SPI set to Steerpoint
• CHINA HAT
• FWD LONG: Slaves all sensors to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT LONG: Slaves TGP to Steerpoint
China Hat Switch

PART 9 – SENSORS
SPI Sensor Indicator 161

TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
1 – SENSORS
Example 1: Targeting Pod (TGP) is the Sensor of Interest, SPI has been defined on the TGP.
A-10C
MAV Page

TGP is SPI
PART 9 – SENSORS
SPI (Sensor point of Interest)
Targeting pod SPI (Sensor

Point of Interest)
Targeting Pod
(Sensor of Interest/SOI)
162
1 – SENSORS
Example 2: Targeting Pod (TGP) is the Sensor of Interest, SPI has been defined on the TGP. All sensors
A-10C
have been slaved with the China Hat Switch FWD LONG.
MAV Page

Targeting Pod
(Sensor of Interest/SOI) TGP is SPI
PART 9 – SENSORS
SPI (Sensor point of Interest)
Targeting pod SPI (Sensor

Point of Interest)
China Hat Switch 163

1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG 1.3 – HUD (HEADS-UP DISPLAY) & TDC
TVV (Total Velocity NAV Master Mode
When the Heads-Up Display is in NAV mode (mode can be cycled with the Master Mode Vector)
A-10C
Switch) and the HUD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) with the Coolie Hat Switch UP, you
can use a TDC (Target Designation Cue) to designate a target.
Ground Stabilized TDC
The TDC is always displayed when the HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI). (Target Designation Cue)
Initially, the TDC will appear caged within the Total Velocity Vector (TVV). The TDC can then
be slewed to any location within the HUD Field of View (FOV). When slew switch is
released, the TDC will attempt to compute a position on the ground (latitude, longitude and HUD is the Sensor of
elevation). If successful, the TDC will ground stabilize on that point. If unsuccessful (location
Interest (SOI)
> 13nm away), an “X” will be drawn over the TDC and the TDC will be HUD stabilized with
an “X” indicating an invalid designation. In this condition, the TDC cannot become the
Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
Even if the HUD is not SOI, commanding slave to SPI will slave the TDC to the position of the
current SPI. The TDC remains slaved until the SPI changes or until the HUD becomes SOI and
the Slew Control switch is used to move the TDC.
When the position designated by a ground stabilized TDC is outside the HUD FOV, but TDC is the Sensor Point
within 60 degrees of the aircraft nose, the TDC symbol is clamped to the HUD FOV on the of Interest (SPI)
appropriate side of the HUD. If the position is outside the HUD FOV and outside of 60
degrees of the aircraft nose, the TDC is clamped to the HUD FOV and horizontally stabilized
to the TVV.
PART 9 – SENSORS
Master Mode Button
164
1 – SENSORS
TMS (Target Management System) Switch
5
To designate a target with the HUD & TDC:
A-10C
1. Press Master Mode Switch to toggle modes until NAV mode is selected.
2. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
3. By default, the TDC (Target Designation Cue) is caged on the Total Velocity Vector (TVV).
4. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TDC to the desired target location.
5. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to make the current TDC location the SPI 1
(Sensor Point of Interest).
6. If you want to reset SPI, press the TMS Switch AFT LONG. Keep in mind that the TDC will remain ground Master Mode Button
stabilized at its current location.
7. If you want to recage the TDC to the TVV, press China Hat switch AFT SHORT. 2
China Hat Switch
Coolie Hat Switch 4
TDC (Target Designation Cue) Caged Slew Control Switch

in TVV (Total Velocity Vector) TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
Tadpole (direction to SPI)
3
TDC is the SPI

4
1 TDC (Target
Designation Cue)
PART 9 – SENSORS
2 HUD is SOI
TDC is the SPI
165
1 – SENSORS
TMS (Target Management System) Switch
These controls work if the HUD is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch UP.
A-10C

• FWD SHORT: Commands TDC ground stabilize attempt
• AFT LONG: SPI reset to Steerpoint location. TDC remains ground stabilized at its current location.
• RIGHT: Sets Markpoint
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your TDC is designating
China Hat Switch
• COOLIE HAT Coolie Hat Switch
• UP: Selects HUD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
Slew Control Switch
• CHINA HAT
• AFT SHORT: Recages TDC to the TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
TVV
PART 9 – SENSORS
TDC
TDC is the SPI
166
1 – SENSORS A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG 1.4 – TISL (TARGET IDENTIFICATION SET, LASER) / PAVE PENNY POD
(A-10C LEGACY ONLY)
A-10C
The Target Identification Set, Laser (TISL) system detects and tracks reflected laser energy. TISL does NOT emit any
laser energy; it is a passive-only system. The TISL can be used to locate targets being laser designated by another
asset such as another aircraft or ground forces.
NOTE: This panel is not functionally implemented in this simulation. With the A-10C, all laser spot detection is done
with the targeting pod in LSS/LST modes.
PART 9 – SENSORS
AAS-35 “Pave Penny” Laser Marked Target Receiver Pod

The Pave Penny laser sensor (marked target seeker) pod that allowed the pilot to
detect laser energy for PID (Positive Identification) of an illuminated target. The Pave
Penny is a passive seeker and cannot self-designate a target for a Laser Guided
Bomb (LGB). Pave Penny control is done through the Target Identification Set, Laser
(TISL) panel in the cockpit. Although Pave Penny functions have largely been
replaced in modern A-10s by the targeting pod, the system and capability remain.
167
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG 2.1 – INTRODUCTION
The AN/AAQ-28 LITENING system is a self-contained, multi-sensor targeting and surveillance system. The LITENING enables aircrews to detect, acquire, auto-track and identify targets at
A-10C
long ranges for weapon delivery or non-traditional intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance missions. LITENING's FLIR, charge-coupled device (CCD), laser imaging sensors, advanced
image processing and digital video output provide useful imagery of targets on the ground, allowing aircrews to identify and engage targets under a wide range of battlefield conditions.
PART 9 – SENSORS
168
WARTHOG 2.2 – DISPLAYS
The targeting pod feed can be displayed on either MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display). To display targeting pod feed, select TGP page and its desired mode (A-G in our case)
A-10C
Targeting Pod Air-to- Targeting Pod Standby Targeting Pod Air-to-

Ground Mode Selector Mode Selector Air Mode Selector Test Display
TV/FLIR Camera Mode
CNTL (A-G Control Setting) CCD: Charge Coupled Device (TV)
Page Selector WHOT: White Hot Infrared
BHOT: Black Hot Infrared
Field-of-View Setting
WIDE/NARROW
LSS (Laser Spot Search) &
LST (Laser Spot Track) Activation
Laser Designator Mode

Gain & Level Schedule LSR: Laser
Controls (based on selector) IR: Infrared Pointer/Marker
BTH: Both LSR & IR simultaneously
Gain & Level Schedule
Control Selector Yardstick: Relative ground distance
covered by the right half of the crosshair
TGP SOI (Sensor of Interest) Indication Targeting Pod Crosshair/Reticle
PART 9 – SENSORS
Track Mode Laser Slant Range Finder (nm)

AREA: Area Track
POINT: Point Track Laser Source
INR-A: Inertial Area (masked) Clock Zulu L: Laser is Active
INR-P: Inertial Point (masked) Time T: Laser is Tracking a Target
INR: Inertial E: Laser is slewing
TGP Reticle Coordinates Laser Status (based on AHCP Switches)
T: Training Selected
P: IR Pointer Armed
L: Laser Armed
TGP Page Selector Laser (LSR) Code B: Both Laser & IR Pointer Armed 169
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod CNTL (A-G Control Setting)
Page Selector
You can access the CNTL (Air-to-Ground Mode Control) page by pressing the OSB next to CNTL.
A-10C
RTN (Returns to TGP Page)
TGP Attitude Advisory

Function (TAAF)
Focus Reset
FRND (Displays Friendly
Units, shown as a Green X) Coordinate Display
LL: Latitude/Longitude
MGRS: Military Grid Reference System
Laser Illumination Code OFF: No coordinates displayed
Laser Latch Function

Laser Spot Search (LSS) Code ON/OFF
PART 9 – SENSORS
Yardstick Unit System

Metric/USA/OFF
FLIR Integration Setting Gain Control Setting

INT HOT / INT COLD MGC: Manual
AGC: Automatic
170
The Targeting Pod View Relative Direction symbol on the FLIR display can give you a good idea of where the pod is pointing in relationship to your aircraft. This view direction is represented in a top-
A-10C
down view.
Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting

Pod View Relative Direction)
Targeting Pod is looking here
Arrow indicates direction towards North

relative to the TGP's display orientation
PART 9 – SENSORS
171
The Targeting Pod also displays data on the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and TAD (Tactical Awareness Display).
A-10C
Laser Status
• L: Laser Designation
• P: IR Pointer Designation
• B: Laser and IR Pointer (BOTH) used simultaneously
• M: Target Masked by Aircraft
TAD TGP SPI Diamond (Sensors Not Slaved)
TGP SPI (All

Sensors Slaved)
PART 9 – SENSORS
TGP SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) Designated by TGP 172

You can also access the A-A (Air-to-Air) Targeting Pod Mode to designate air targets.
A-10C
Targeting Pod Air-to-Air Mode Selector
Laser Mode
CMBT: Combat
TRNG: Training
PART 9 – SENSORS
173
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod TMS (Target Management System) Switch
A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG 2.3 – CONTROLS (A-10C LEGACY)
These controls work if the TGP Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch.
A-10C

• FWD SHORT: Point Track/Area Track Toggle
• AFT SHORT: INR Track
• LEFT: Reset WCN (Warning, Caution & Notes)

• FWD/AFT SHORT: Increases/Decreases Zoom Level
• RIGHT SHORT: Laser Designator Toggle (LSR, IR, BOTH)
• RIGHT LONG: LSS (Laser Spot Search) Toggle DMS (Data Management Switch) Nosewheel Steering Button
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Targeting Pod / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
• COOLIE HAT
• LEFT/RIGHT LONG: Selects MFCD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different TV or FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
PART 9 – SENSORS
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: Field-of-View Wide/Narrow Toggle
• AFT SHORT: Boresight TGP
• AFT LONG: Slaves TGP to Steerpoint Boat Switch
• NOSEWHEEL STEERING BUTTON
• Used to fire laser
China Hat Switch
Slew Control Switch
174
Coolie Hat Switch
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod TMS (Target Management System) Switch
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 2.3 – CONTROLS (A-10C II TANK KILLER)
These controls work if the TGP Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch.
A-10C II

• FWD SHORT: Point Track/Area Track Toggle
• AFT SHORT: FLIR Autofocus
• LEFT SHORT: Reset WCN (Warning, Caution & Notes)
• LEFT LONG: SPI Broadcast
• RIGHT SHORT: Sets Markpoint
• RIGHT LONG: Set Last Markpoint as the SPI

• FWD/AFT SHORT: Increases/Decreases Zoom Level DMS (Data Management Switch) Nosewheel Steering Button
• LEFT SHORT: Right MFCD Video on HMIT (Helmet-Mounted Integrated Targeting)
• LEFT LONG: HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) ON/OFF
• RIGHT SHORT: Laser Designator Toggle (LSR, IR, BOTH)
• RIGHT LONG: Slave TGP (Targeting Pod) to HMIT Line-of-Sight
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Targeting Pod / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
• COOLIE HAT
PART 9 – SENSORS
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different TV or FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• CHINA HAT Boat Switch

• AFT SHORT: LSS (Laser Spot Search) Toggle
• AFT LONG: Slaves TGP to Current Steerpoint
China Hat Switch
Slew Control Switch
• NOSEWHEEL STEERING BUTTON
175
• Used to fire laser Coolie Hat Switch
WARTHOG 2.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
1. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP
A-10C
Feed Page.
2. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the
targeting pod.
3b
3. A 2-minute warm-up period is required. TGP Display will start from TGP OFF, then 3a
transition to NOT TIMED OUT during the warm-up process.
4. Once targeting pod warm-up sequence is complete, the NOT TIMED OUT indication
will disappear.
5. Set MASTER ARM and LASER ARM switches to ARM.
4
3c
PART 9 – SENSORS
1b
176
1a
WARTHOG 2.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE 6
6. Select AG (Air-to-Ground) TGP Mode by pressing the OSB next to AG.

A-10C
7. When the TGP goes from STBY mode to AG mode, this will un-stow
the camera. Confirm that Targeting Pod mode switches from STBY to
AG.
8. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that
displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the
right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
8b Coolie Hat Switch
6
PART 9 – SENSORS
8c
8a
TGP is SOI
177
9. Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
A-10C

• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot) 13
10. Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
11. Select desired Laser Designator Mode (LSR) with OSB.
12. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter the TGP AG Control Page.
13. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose the
default laser code 1688.
14. Press on the OSB next to “L” (Laser Designation Code) to enter laser code 9 Boat Switch 7
1688.
15. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched Slew Control Switch
once fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose 10 China Hat Switch
LATCH OFF.
16. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page.
12b
12a 16
PART 9 – SENSORS
14
15
11
178
17. Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle
A-10C
on the target.
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight):
• A-10C LEGACY: Press the China Hat Switch AFT SHORT
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: In the TGP page, press
the OSB next to B-S (Boresight Function)
18. Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust
Zoom Level.
19. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track
the target. This will toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static
target) and POINT TRACK (moving target).
20. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to 17
designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). Slew Control Switch 18
19 / 20
21. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor
Point of Interest (SPI). 17 21 China Hat Switch TMS Switch DMS Switch 22b
22. Press and hold Nosewheel Steering Button
(“Insert” binding) to fire laser. Nosewheel Steering Button
TGP Reticle
PART 9 – SENSORS
20 19
22a 22c Laser is Firing
179
TGP Sensor Point of Interest Designated
• Note: Once all sensors are slaved to the TGP Target Track, the Heads-Up Display and TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) will also
A-10C
display information about where the targeting pod is looking.
TAD TGP SPI Diamond (Sensors Not Slaved)
Laser is Firing
“L” is blinking
TGP SPI (All

PART 9 – SENSORS
Sensors Slaved)
TGP SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
Laser is Firing
180
WARTHOG 2.5 – SLAVING TGP TO A STEERPOINT
1. Verify that targeting pod (TGP) is powered and set to A-G mode.
A-10C
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all
waypoints available for the current mission)
3. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to STEER
4. On the UFC (Up Front Control), use the STEER rocker switch to select desired steerpoint (or 6
any other method described in the NAVIGATION section).
5. Press TMS (Target Management System) Switch AFT LONG to set the selected Steerpoint China Hat Switch
as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). 5 TMS Switch
6. Press China Hat AFT LONG to slave the TGP to the Steerpoint.
1
Targeting Pod Reticle

Targeting Pod Diamond (Slaved to Steerpoint)
6
5
PART 9 – SENSORS
4
Steerpoint is the SPI
Waypoint Number & Name
acting as Steerpoint (SPI)
4
Targeting Pod Diamond

(Slaved to Steerpoint)
181
2 3
WARTHOG 2.5 – SLAVING TGP TO A STEERPOINT
7. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT
A-10C
since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
8. Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target. The TGP
designation procedure is the same as in the previous START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE section.
9. If you want to make the targeting pod’s reticle the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press TMS (Target
Management Switch) FWD LONG.
7
TMS Switch
9b Coolie Hat Switch
8
Slew Control Switch
TGP Diamond (Not the SPI)

9a TGP Reticle (Slaved to Steerpoint)
TGP Reticle (Area Track) 8
Steerpoint is the SPI Steerpoint (SPI)
7
PART 9 – SENSORS
9c TGP Diamond (SPI) TGP is SOI 182

Targeting Pod Reticle is the SPI
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG 2.6 – BORESIGHT FUNCTION (A-10C LEGACY)
2a Coolie Hat Switch
The Boresight function of the targeting pod is very useful if you find a target of opportunity and want to slew the
A-10C
TGP right in front of you.
1. Verify that targeting pod (TGP) is powered and set to A-G mode.
2. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we
have the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
3. Press the China Hat Switch AFT SHORT
4. The targeting pod will boresight at 150 mils below the zero sight line of the aircraft, directly forward.
China Hat Switch

2b
TGP is SOI
TGP Diamond
(Boresighted)
PART 9 – SENSORS
183
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 2.6 – BORESIGHT FUNCTION (A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION) a
The Boresight function of the targeting pod is very useful if you find a target of opportunity and want to slew
A-10C II
the TGP right in front of you.
1. In the TGP page, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to B-S (Boresight Function)
2. The targeting pod will boresight at 150 mils (default value) below the zero sight line of the aircraft, directly
forward.
Note: you can customize the targeting pod’s boresight depression angle. To do so:
a) Enter the desired depression in mils (we can take “250” as an example) on the UFC (Up-Front Control)
1 b
scratchpad
b) In the TGP page, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to B-S (Boresight Function)
PART 9 – SENSORS
TGP Diamond
(Boresighted)
184
WARTHOG 2.7 – LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode 1
The targeting pod can also spot and track a laser from someone else (a friendly A-10 lasing his own target, or a JTAC,
A-10C
Joint Tactical Air Controller, calling an air strike). To track another laser:
1. Find out what the laser code used by the friendly is (in our case, the friendly JTAC uses code 1688). Make sure
the friendly asset is lasing the target before attempting to track it.
2. Power up the Targeting Pod, select TGP page and set A-G TGP Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
5. Enter the desired Laser Code to be searched on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose the default laser code
1688.
6. Press on the OSB next to “LSS” (Laser Spot Search Code) to enter LSS code 1688.
2a 5
7
4
2c
PART 9 – SENSORS
6
3

2b
WARTHOG 2.7 – LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode
8. Slew the targeting pod using the TDC Slew controls within the vicinity of the
A-10C
JTAC location. If the targeting pod is looking too far from the laser, it will not
be able to find the laser.
9. Press the OSB next to “LSS” (Laser Spot Search).
• Alternatively, you can also use a shortcut to start LSS operation: 10
• A-10C LEGACY: use the DMS (Data Management Switch)
RIGHT LONG.
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: use the China Hat AFT
SHORT
10. When the LSS operation starts, the TGP will be searching for a laser 9a
designation to track. “LSRCH” will be displayed in the lower center of the
display. The Situational Awareness Cue will indicate where the pod is
DMS Switch
scanning.
Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting Pod View Relative Direction)
9a
9b
PART 9 – SENSORS
9b
10
China Hat Switch

8
9a
Slew Control Switch
186
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod 13 13
11. When the TGP has detected a laser energy reflection, “DETECT” will replace
A-10C
“LSRCH” on the display, and the OSB label will change from “LSS” to “LST”
to indicate Laser Spot Track. The TGP line of sight will then automatically
slew to the detected laser reflection.
12. After 1 second, “DETECT” will be replaced with “LTRACK” and a box
(container) measuring the size of the tracking gate will overlay the laser
energy spot. TGP Diamond
13. On the HUD, the TGP diamond will mark the position of the Laser Spot
(HUD)
Track (LST). The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) will also display the LST.
14. To exit LSS/LST mode, press OSB next to LSS.
TAD LST
14
Friendly JTAC
Laser Spot (Target)

PART 9 – SENSORS
11b 12
11a
187
a
When working with a JTAC (Joint Tactical Air Controller), a “9-line”
A-10C
transmission is sent to you. Basically, it is a set of commands and information

that is used to guide you to the target. You will likely see a “NEW TASKING”
message sent to you.
a) NEW TASKING indication means a message has been sent to you from
the JTAC.
b) To read 9-line message, select the MSG page.
c) Press OSB next to ACK (Acknowledge) to remove the white “NEW
TASKING” message indication. Alternatively you can also clear the note
with a TMS Left Short press.
d) You can return to the TGP page.
b
PART 9 – SENSORS
d c 188
b
WARTHOG 2.8 – LASER POINTER/MARKER
The targeting pod can also use a laser marker (the laser marker cannot be tracked by air-to-ground weapons), which is an infrared laser that can only be seen with
A-10C
night vision goggles (RSHIFT+H to toggle NVGs). This is used mainly to provide a visual reference to other aircraft on where a target is.
1. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
2. Set Master ARM and LASER ARM switches to ARM.
3. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set
the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
4. Select Laser Designator Mode to IR (Infrared) with OSB.
5. Slew TGP reticle as shown previously on desired target.
6. Press and hold Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert” binding) to fire laser. “P” (Infrared Pointer) indication will flash while pointer is firing.

1
Laser Pointer is Firing 6

PART 9 – SENSORS
4 Coolie Hat Switch 3

3
Laser Pointer is Firing 6

189
1
WARTHOG 2.8 – LASER POINTER/MARKER
I strongly suggest that you adjust your HUD Brightness with the INTEN rocker switch on the Up-Front Control if you want to be able to
A-10C
see the IR marking laser.
HUD Brightness Rocker

Switch
PART 9 – SENSORS
Laser Marker
Laser Marker
190
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 9 – SENSORS
Maverick Missile
191
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight
A-10C
Maverick Release Maverick Seeker Center

Profile Name
Active Maverick EO (Electro-Optical) Function

Station Number Powers on Maverick missile station
Adjustment Boresight Function

Adjusts boresight position of the Maverick.
Slew the Maverick to the desired boresight
position, and press the OSB next to ADJ OFF.
With ADJ ON, the next time you cage the
missile to boresight, it will automatically cage
to the set position.
Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ) Maverick Slew Rate Data Field
5 deg Maverick Depression Marker

PART 9 – SENSORS
Maverick EO (Electro-
Optical) Power Timer
Maverick (MAV) Page 192

A-10C
Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
PART 9 – SENSORS
193
Maverick Data is also visible on the Heads-Up Display.
A-10C
Maverick Upper Tick Mark

Tick mark at the top of the DLZ staple represents the
Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm.
Maverick Reticle
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic

Launch Zone) Range Staple
Maverick Line of
PART 9 – SENSORS
Target Range Caret Sight Range (nm)

and Numeric (nm)
Maverick Lower Tick Mark

Tick mark at the bottom of the DLZ
staple represents the Maverick’s
minimum range. Maverick Release
Profile Name
Missile Time of Flight (sec) MAV: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Maverick 194
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG 3.2 – CONTROLS (A-10C LEGACY) TMS (Target Management System) Switch
These controls work if the MAV Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
A-10C
and the Maverick missile is selected from the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page.

• FWD SHORT: Missile Track
• AFT SHORT: Ground Stabilize
• LEFT LONG: Space Stabilize

• FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT: Maverick Reticle UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT DMS (Data Management Switch) AGM-65D Maverick Selected
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Maverick / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
• COOLIE HAT
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different Maverick modes
• FWD: Black Symbols
PART 9 – SENSORS
• MIDDLE: Force Correlate / AUTO

• AFT: White Symbols
• CHINA HAT
• AFT SHORT: Maverick Missile Step (selects other missile) / Resets missile to boresight position Boat Switch
China Hat Switch

Slew Control Switch

3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile TMS (Target Management
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 3.2 – CONTROLS (A-10C II TANK KILLER) System) Switch
These controls work if the MAV Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
A-10C II
and the Maverick missile is selected from the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page.

• FWD SHORT: Missile Track
• AFT SHORT: Ground Stabilize
• RIGHT SHORT: Sets Markpoint
• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch DMS (Data Management Switch) AGM-65D Maverick Selected
• FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT SHORT: Maverick Reticle UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
• FWD LONG: Gyro Stabilize
• RIGHT LONG: Slave Maverick to HMIT (Helmet-Mounted Integrated Targeting) Line-of-Sight
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Maverick / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
• COOLIE HAT
PART 9 – SENSORS
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different Maverick modes
Boat Switch
• CHINA HAT
• FWD LONG: Slaves all sensors to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) China Hat Switch
• AFT SHORT: Resets missile to boresight position (recage seeker) Slew Control Switch

4 – SCORPION HMCS (HELMET-MOUNTED CUEING SYSTEM) A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
PART 9 – SENSORS
197
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.1 - Introduction
The Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) allows the pilot to command a sensor to the user line of sight and provides situational awareness via a Helmet Mounted Display (HMD).
A-10C II
The HMCS displays both HUD (Heads-Up Display) and TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) symbology on your helmet line-of-sight, which can be interacted with other sensors like the targeting pod. The
situational awareness increase provided by the Scorpion is incredible and will make you feel like you’re playing a video game inside a video game.
I highly recommend that you check out Redkite’s HMCS tutorial: https://youtu.be/NJjHu_H1ImY
HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)

HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System)
PART 9 – SENSORS
198
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.2 – HMCS Power-Up & Setup
To power up the HMCS:
A-10C II
1. The HMCS is powered on with the HMCS Power Switch set to ON.
2. The default setting for the HMCS is that the HMD overlay will only be visible when looking away from the Heads-Up Display.
3. To toggle the HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) overlay ON or OFF, press DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT LONG.
Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Power Switch

• ON (FWD): Power to the HMCS through the aircraft electrical power supply system
• OFF (MIDDLE): Power removed from the HMCS.
• BAT (AFT): Power to the HMCS using a battery stored in the panel. This allows it to
be tested without need of aircraft electrical power.
HMD Overlay
DMS (Data
PART 9 – SENSORS
Management Switch)
199
Expansion Only
The HMCS contains three preset profiles, which can be modified at will using the STAT page’s HMCS sub-menu. Editing a profile will let you choose:
A-10C II
• What symbols are displayed on the HMD regardless of helmet orientation (ON),
• What symbols are hidden (OFF),
• What symbols are hidden when the helmet’s line of sight is lined up with the aircraft’s Heads-Up Display (OCLD for “Occludable”).
• A display cutoff range (symbols will only appear when they are within the specified range in nautical miles)
Note: the HORIZON LINE symbol is an exception and can be set to OFF, NORM (Normal) and GHST (Ghost) .
HMCS Symbol Cutoff Range (nm)
HMCS Profile Selectors – is displayed when not applicable
HMCS Symbol Visibility
OCLD/ON/OFF
OTR PAGE (Other Page) OSBs
HMCS Symbols Scrolls further down the list of
options
HMCS Symbol
Selection Arrow
HMCS Symbol Selection

Decrement/Increment OSBs
(Option Select Buttons)
HMCS Symbol Visibility

Toggle OSB
PART 9 – SENSORS
HMCS Symbol Cutoff

Range Entry OSB HMCS Day Brightness
Mode OSB
HMCS Night Brightness

Mode OSB
200
Expansion Only
Here is a summary of all different HMCS Symbology page options:
A-10C II
PART 9 – SENSORS
201
4 – SCORPION HMCS (HELMET-MOUNTED CUEING SYSTEM) 2b A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
To modify an existing HMCS profile: 3
A-10C II
1. Select STAT (Status) page by pressing OSB (Option Select Button) Next to STAT.
2. Select HMCS Symbology page by pressing OSB next to HMCS
3. Select the HMCS profile you wish to change by using the OSB next to either PRO1, PRO2 or PRO3.
4. Press OSBs next to SYMBOL arrows to increment/decrement selection arrow to the HMCS symbology option you want to change.
OSBs next to OTR PAGE (Other Page) can scroll further down the list as well.
5. Press OSB next to OCLD/ON/OFF to toggle between visibility options.
6. OPTIONAL: To modify the selected symbol’s cutoff range, enter the desired cutoff range (in nm) on the UFC Scratchpad. We will
choose 25 nm. Then, press OSB next to “RANGE”.
2a
4b
5b
4a
PART 9 – SENSORS
1
5a
6a
6b
6c
202
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.2 – HMCS Power-Up & Setup HMCS Crosshair, Own SPI and HDC occluded
Profile Recommendation
A-10C II
While occluding most of the HMCS symbology is recommended in order to avoid cluttering your HUD, I
would recommend using these few particular HMCS settings in order to see them through the HUD while
doing an attack run.
• CROSSHAIR – ON
• OWN SPI – ON
• HDC – ON
HMCS Crosshair, Own SPI and HDC ON

PART 9 – SENSORS
203
Expansion Only
Coolie Hat Switch
To cycle between HMCS profiles:
A-10C II
1. Set the HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) by pressing the Coolie Hat
Switch DOWN. The asterisk on the HMD overlay will indicate the HMCS is SOI.
2. Press DMS (Data Management Switch) RIGHT SHORT to cycle between the three profiles.
Alternatively, you can also go in the HMCS Symbology page and select the profile via the Profile
Selector OSBs.
DMS (Data
Management Switch)
Profile 2 Selected Profile 2 Selected

PART 9 – SENSORS
Profile 1 Selected
HMCS SOI Asterisk

204
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.3 – HMCS Symbology
Since a lot of information can be displayed at once on the HMD, we will break down the HMCS components in the following categories:
A-10C II
• Basic HMD Symbology (basic aircraft and HMCS data)

• Navigation HMD Symbology (Markpoints, Steerpoints, etc.)
• Unit HMD Symbology (nearby unit symbols that you would typically find on the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) page obtained from Datalink)
• Designation HMD Symbology (when you “hook” a symbol with the helmet or targeting pod data)
PART 9 – SENSORS
205
Expansion Only
4.3.1 – Basic HMD Symbology
A-10C II
Basic symbology refers mainly to aircraft flight parameters.
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) Heading
Horizon Line SPI Line

Points towards the Sensor Point of Interest. The
longer the line, the higher the angle off SPI.
HDC (Helmet Designation

Cursor) Barometric Altitude (ft)
PART 9 – SENSORS
Indicated Airspeed (kts) Crosshair
Aircraft Heading
Radar Altitude (ft)
HMCS SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk
Aircraft Pitch Ladder (deg) 206

Expansion Only
4.3.2 – Navigation HMD Symbology
A-10C II
The navigation symbols include all steerpoints in the navigation database and markpoints.
Current Steerpoint
(BANKS1)
Steerpoint
(CHEVY1)
PART 9 – SENSORS
Current Markpoint
(MRK A)
207
Expansion Only
4.3.3 – Unit HMD Symbology
A-10C II
Various units that are within the same datalink network are visible on the HMCS, such as friendly ground units equipped with EPLRS, members of your own flight and friendly aircraft within the
same datalink network.
Friendly Ground Unit

Friendly ground forces; unit must be assigned an
Enhanced Position Location Reporting System (EPLRS)
radio to broadcast their location Air PPLI (Precise Participant Location and Identification)
Friendly aircraft on the SADL datalink network but on a
separate GROUP ID number.
• Lower number: altitude of aircraft in thousands of feet
Flight Member
Aircraft on the SADL network and on the same GROUP ID
number as you.
• Center number: OWN ID of the aircraft within the flight
PART 9 – SENSORS
208
Expansion Only
4.3.4 – Designation HMD Symbology
A-10C II
When designating a target, a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) is created. SPI symbols are displayed on the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), but also on the HMCS display.
Own SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Line between Donor and his SPI (Dashed Line)
This is a SPI created by yourself. A dashed line is for a between a Mini-SPI and its donor, which is on
the SADL network but on a separate GROUP ID number as yourself
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Broadcast from Wingman), also referred to as a “Mini-SPI”
SPI is being broadcast by an aircraft on the SADL network on the same GROUP ID number as
yourself.
• Upper number: Range from SPI Broadcast (nm)
Donor SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), also referred • Center number: Identification Number of Wingman broadcasting the SPI
to as a “Mini-SPI”
SPI is being broadcast by friendly aircraft on the SADL
datalink network but on a separate GROUP ID number.
• Upper number: Range from SPI Broadcast (nm)
PART 9 – SENSORS
Line between Flight Member Donor and his SPI (Full Line)
Screenshot taken from A full line is for a between a Mini-SPI and its donor, which is on the 209
Redkite’s HMCS Tutorial Video SADL network on the same GROUP ID number as yourself
Expansion Only
4.3.5 – Targeting Pod HMD Symbology
A-10C II
The targeting pod symbology is visible on the HMCS.
Targeting Pod Designation Diamond
Targeting Pod Field-of-View Box

PART 9 – SENSORS
Targeting Pod Feed – HMCS Overlay

By pressing DMS LEFT SHORT when either the Targeting Pod or the
HMCS is the Sensor of Interest (performed with Coolie Hat Switch),
a TGP feed repeater is displayed on your helmet. 210
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.4 – HMCS Controls TMS (Target Management System) Switch
These controls work if the HMCS is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch is pressed UP and the SOI
A-10C II
Asterisk is visible on your HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display).

• FWD SHORT: Hook Symbol under Crosshair
• FWD LONG: Make Hooked Object or HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor) the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT SHORT: Un-Hook Symbol
• AFT LONG: Reset SPI to Steerpoint
• LEFT LONG: Broadcast SPI
• RIGHT SHORT: Create Mark Point at HDC
HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor)
• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch DMS (Data Management Switch)
• FWD SHORT/LONG: Increase HMD Brightness Crosshair
• AFT SHORT/LONG: Decrease HMD Brightness
• LEFT SHORT: Display Right MFCD TGP (Targeting Pod) Video on HMD
• LEFT LONG: HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) ON/OFF Toggle
• RIGHT SHORT: Cycle HMCS Profiles
• RIGHT LONG: Slave Targeting Pod to HMCS Line-of-Sight (LOS)
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control your HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor)
PART 9 – SENSORS
• COOLIE HAT
• UP: Selects HUD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• DOWN: Selects HMCS as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• BOAT SWITCH
• Targeting Pod Functions: Cycle through different TV or FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot) Boat Switch
• CHINA HAT
China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT: Targeting Pod Field-of-View Wide/Narrow Toggle
Slew Control Switch
• AFT SHORT: Recage HDC to Crosshair
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.5 – HMCS Functions TMS (Target Management System) Switch
4.5.1 – Hooking HMD Symbols
A-10C II
Similarly to the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), if you want to have a bearing, distance and elevation information on a specific HMCS
symbol, you can “hook” a symbol when the HMCS is the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
1. Set the HMCS as the SOI: press the Coolie Hat Switch DOWN. Make sure the HMCS SOI Asterisk is visible.
2. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair over the desired HMD symbol you want to hook.
3. Once HMD crosshair is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the symbol.
4. Hooked Symbol Data will be displayed on the lower left of the HMD.
5. A dashed box will appear over the hooked symbol and a yellow line will be drawn between the hooked symbol and the HMD
crosshair.
6. To Un-Hook a symbol, press the TMS (Target Management System) AFT SHORT.
Hooked Symbol Line (Yellow)

Points towards the hooked symbol. The
HMCS SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk longer the line, the higher the angle off.
HMD Crosshair Hooked Symbol Dashed Box

Hooked Symbol (F-16) Data
• 092: Bearing To Symbol (deg)
• 4: Distance To Symbol (nm)
• 6544: Symbol Elevation (ft)
PART 9 – SENSORS
• F 16: Unit Type (if available)
Hooked Symbol Data (for air units)

• Aircraft Heading/Aircraft Airspeed (kts)
SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest)
SPI Line (Green)

Points towards the Sensor Point of Interest. The longer the line, the higher the angle off SPI. 212
Coolie Hat Switch
Expansion Only
4.5.2 – Creating a SPI via HMCS 3 5 6
A-10C II
METHOD 1: Create a SPI on a hooked symbol
2. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair over the desired HMD symbol you want to hook.
3. Once HMD crosshair is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the symbol.
4. A dashed box will appear over the hooked symbol and a yellow line will be drawn between the hooked symbol and the HMD
crosshair.
5. Press TMS FWD LONG to create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the hooked symbol.
6. To Un-Hook a symbol, press the TMS (Target Management System) AFT SHORT. To reset the SPI to the selected steerpoint without
un-hooking the symbol, press TMS AFT LONG.
Friendly Ground Unit with EPLRS active

Symbol we want to designate as SPI

1
HMD Crosshair 2
SPI (Sensor Point

PART 9 – SENSORS
of Interest)
Hooked Symbol Dashed Box

1
Expansion Only
4.5.2 – Creating a SPI via HMCS 5 6
A-10C II
METHOD 2: Create a SPI with the HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor)
2. Press China Hat AFT SHORT to recage the HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor) to the HMD Crosshair
3. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair near the desired target you want to designate and create a SPI (Sensor Point of
Interest) over.
4. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the ground-stabilized HDC over the target you want to designate as a SPI.
5. Once HDC is over the desired target, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD LONG to create a SPI on the HDC.
6. To reset the SPI to the selected steerpoint without un-hooking the symbol, press TMS AFT LONG.
1 HMD Crosshair (HDC Caged)
2
PART 9 – SENSORS
HMD Crosshair
3 5
SPI (Sensor Point

of Interest)
4
China Hat Switch
4 Slew Control Switch
2
Cursor) 1 Coolie Hat Switch 214
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.5 – HMCS Functions 6
4.5.3 – Targeting Pod Slaving to LOS via HMCS TMS (Target Management System) Switch
A-10C II
An interesting functionality is to combine the SPI generation ability of the HMCS with the TGP, which can be slaved to the HMCS Line of Sight (LOS).
1. Power up the targeting pod and set it in A-G mode.

4. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair near the desired target you want to designate and create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) over.
5. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the ground-stabilized HDC over the target you want to designate as a SPI.
6. Once HDC is over the desired target, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD LONG to create a SPI on the HDC.
7. Press DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT SHORT to display the Targeting Pod Feed Overlay on the HMCS.
7
HMCS SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk HMD Crosshair 1
2

Cursor)
5
PART 9 – SENSORS
SPI (Sensor Point

of Interest)
1 3
5
China Hat Switch
Slew Control Switch
7 Targeting Pod Feed – HMCS Overlay 2 Coolie Hat Switch 215

Expansion Only
4.5.3 – Targeting Pod Slaving to LOS via HMCS
A-10C II
8. Press DMS RIGHT LONG to Slave Targeting Pod to HMCS Line-of-Sight (LOS), or in that case the SPI we
just created over the HDC.
9. The Targeting Pod Field-of-View Box will then appear once the targeting pod is slaved to the SPI.
10. You can cycle through different TV or FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes using the Boat Switch.
11. You can slew the TGP (Targeting Pod) by pressing the Coolie Hat LONG in the direction of the TGP
page to make it SOI (Sensor of Interest), then using the Slew Control switch and other TGP HOTAS
controls. Slew Control Switch 8b
Boat Switch
Coolie Hat Switch DMS (Data Management Switch)
8a
Targeting Pod Field-of-View Box
8c
SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest)
PART 9 – SENSORS

Cursor)
Targeting Pod Feed – HMCS Overlay 216

Expansion Only
4.5.4 – Markpoint Creation via HMCS 5 6
A-10C II
3. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair near the desired target you want to designate and create a markpoint over.
4. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the ground-stabilized HDC over the target you want to create a markpoint on.
5. Once HDC is over the desired target, press TMS (Target Management System) RIGHT SHORT to create a markpoint on the HDC.
6. (Optional) You can create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the last created markpoint by pressing TMS RIGHT LONG.
1 HMD Crosshair (HDC Caged)
2
PART 9 – SENSORS
HMD Crosshair
3 5
Markpoint (MRK A)
4
China Hat Switch
4 Slew Control Switch
2
Cursor) 1 Coolie Hat Switch 217
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 4.5 – HMCS Functions
4.5.4 – Markpoint Creation via HMCS
A-10C II
In order to view all available markpoints, set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you will access all markpoints).
AAP Steerpoint Selector to MISSION, AAP Steerpoint Selector to MARK,

only last Markpoint is visible. all Markpoints are visible.
PART 9 – SENSORS
218
WARTHOG
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Introduction • 3 – Air-to-Air Weapons

A-10C
• 1.1 – Introduction to Weapons • 3.1 – GAU-8 Gun (Air-to-Air)

• 1.2 – My Weapons Control Setup • 3.2 – AIM-9 Sidewinder
• 1.3 – DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) Page
• 1.4 – Re-Arming Considerations • 4 – Ordnance Jettison
• 1.5 – Master Modes • 4.1 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
• 1.6 – Bomb Delivery Modes •
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
4.2 – Emergency Stores Jettison

• 1.7 – Procedures Summary
• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
• 2.1 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82 Low Drag – CCIP)
• 2.1.1 – Manual CCIP Release Mode
• 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR Release Mode
• 2.2 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82AIR High Drag – CCRP)
• 2.3 – Rockets (CCIP)
• 2.4 – GAU-8 Gun (Air-to-Ground)
• 2.4.1 – Introduction
• 2.4.2 – CCIP Reticle
• 2.4.3 – CCIP Cross
• 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 Reticle
• 2.4.5 – 4000 Ft Wind Corrected Cross
• 2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM (JTAC Coordinates)
• 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (Targeting Pod)
• 2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD (CCRP + Targeting Pod)
• 2.8 – GBU-12 Paveway II (Laser-Guided)
• 2.9 – AGM-65 Infrared Maverick (MAV Sensor)
• 2.10 – AGM-65 Infrared Maverick (Targeting Pod)
• 2.11 – AGM-65L Laser Maverick (Targeting Pod + Laser) – A-10C II Tank Killer Only
• 2.12 – GBU-54 Laser JDAM (Targeting Pod + Laser) – A-10C II Tank Killer Only
• 2.13 – APKWS Laser-Guided Rockets (Targeting Pod + Laser) – A-10C II Tank Killer Only
219
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS
WARTHOG
The A-10C can use a HUGE variety of weapons.
A good loadout is not necessarily the biggest bomb: a good loadout is the one that you know how to
A-10C
use and are most comfortable with… and yet that remains flexible enough to allow you to adapt to
different targets and situations.
There is a mindblowing selection of ordnance to pick from and it is easy to feel lost by the sheer
number of different bombs. We will briefly explore the types of bombs together to help you
understand what they are all about.
• Unguided rockets
• GAU-8/A 30 mm Gun
• Air-to-Ground Missile
• Ex: AGM-65 MAVERICK (AGM = Air-to-Ground Missile)
• Air-to-Air Infrared Seeking Missile

• AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
• Unguided bombs
• Ex: Mk-82, Mk-82AIR, Mk-84
• PGM: Precision Guided Munition

• LGB: Laser-Guided Bombs / GBU (Guided Bomb Unit)
• Bomb is guided by a laser beam from operators on the ground, a JTAC or your own
TGP (targeting pod).
• Ex: GBU-10, GBU-12
• IAM: Inertially Aided Munition

• JDAM (Joint Directed Attack Munition)
• Bomb is guided by a GPS satellite. Fire & Forget.
• Ex: GBU-38, GBU-31
• WCMD (Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser)
• Guided by INS (Inertial Navigation System) . Fire & Forget.
• Ex: CBU-87, CBU-97, CBU-105
220
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
The A-10C II “Tank Killer” Expansion has three new weapons available:
• AGM-65L Maverick: Laser-guided air-to-ground missile.

A-10C II
• GBU-54 LJDAM: A hybrid of a GBU-38 JDAM and a GBU-12 laser-guided bomb is the GBU-54/A LJDAM (Laser Joint Directed Attack Munition). This weapon can act in both INS/GPS
and laser-guidance modes, this allowing it launch-and-leave and engaging through cloud/dust as an INS/GPS weapon, and with the precision and ability to engage moving targets that
laser-guidance provides. The GBU-54/A is a strap-on guidance kit for a standard Mk-82 general purpose bomb. The guidance kit includes both the GPS/INS guidance kit and a laser
seeker / target detection guidance kit that allows the bomb to guide on moving targets.
• APKWS (Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System): also displayed as the AGR-20A, the APKWS combines a standard 2.75-inch high explosive rocket with a laser guidance kit and
control fins. There are two warhead options: the M-151 (High Explosive) and the M-282 (Penetrator Warhead).
AGM-65L Laser-Guided Maverick

APKWS Laser-Guided Rockets
221
GBU-54 Laser-Guided JDAM
1.2 – MY WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP
WARTHOG
The A-10C weapon systems are controlled pretty much exclusively with the stick and throttle. This gives you tremendous functionality at your fingertips.
Each function of these controls will change based on what sensor is selected as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) and what Master Mode is selected.
A-10C
Master Mode Button
Gun Trigger
(2-stage detent) Boat Switch
China Hat Switch

Slew Control Switch
Coolie Hat Switch
Nosewheel Steering Button TMS (Target Management System) Switch
222
1.2 – MY WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP (A-10C LEGACY) A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG
Here is a summary of control functions based on SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C
223
Down UHF SOI
Selected
Switch Action
1.2 – MY WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP (A-10C II TANK KILLER)
Speed
Fwd
Aft
Fwd
TAD TGP HUD
Transmit
Retract
A/A Speedbrakes
Extend
MAV
Front Speedbrakes
Radio (Rotary = VHF)
HMCS HMCS B/S MSG A-10C II Tank Killer
Brake Expansion Only
TANK KILLER Mic Center
Aft HoldAft
Transmit Speedbrakes
Radio (Rotary Position
= Anything)
Here is a summary
Switch Up of control functions based on SOI (Sensor(Rotary
No Transmit of Interest).
=
MAV Anything)
Down
Fwd TGP FLIR Black Hot UHF Dark/Cold TGP FLIR Black Hot
Fwd HOTAS Commands Retract - Throttle
Speedbrakes
Light/Hot
A-10C II
Speed
Aft Selected
Extend SOI
Speedbrakes
Switch
Brake Action MAV
Center
Aft TAD TGP HUD
TGP FLIR White Hot Hold A/A
Speedbrakes MAVPosition HMCS HMCS
TGP FLIR B/SHotMSG
White
Boat Light/Hot
Fwd Transmit Front Radio (Rotary
MAV = VHF)
Switch Dark/Cold
Mic Aft
Fwd Transmit
TGP FLIR Black Hot Aft Radio (Rotary
Dark/Cold= Anything) TGP FLIR Black Hot
Switch Up No Transmit (RotaryBoresight
= Anything)
Light/Hot
Down
Center TGP CCD UHF Forced TGP CCD
MAV
Correlation
Fwd Retract Speedbrakes
Boat
Speed Aft TGP FLIR White Hot Light/Hot TGP FLIR White Hot
Aft Auto
Extend Speedbrakes
Switch
Brake Dark/Cold
Center FOV Hold Speedbrakes PositionTGP FOV
MAV Uncage/ Boresight
FOV Change FOV
MAV Change -
Video/ Consent to Forced
FwdCenter
Fwd Toggle LSS FOV
TGP FLIR
TGP Black
CCD SOI Change
Hot Self-Track Dark/Cold LSS FOVTGP FLIR TGP Black
CCD Hot
MAV Correlation Change
Short Change Light/Hot
China Long Slave All toAuto
SPI
MAV
Hat FOV TGP FOV
Boat Aft TGP FLIR White Recage/ Light/Hot
MAVHot Uncage/ Recage/ Reset/Cage TGP FLIR White Hot
Reset
FOV ChangeLSS Reset/Cage FOV Change -
Switch Short Manualto Dark/Cold
Video/ Consent Manual HDC to
Aft
Fwd Cursor Toggle
Toggle LSS FOV TDC to TVV Change LSS FOV
MAV SOI Self-Track
Short Change Boresight Change
China Long Slave TGP to Current
Slave Forced
All to Steerpoint
SPI
Center TGP CCD TGP CCD
Hat Forward Correlation
Position Lights to DimStaedy / Strobes OFF
Pinky Recage/ Recage/ Reset/Cage
Aft Reset LSS Reset/Cage Auto Panel
Exterior Lights per Lighting
Switch Short Manual Manual HDC to
Aft Center Toggle TDC to TVVBlack Out All Exterior Lights
Cursor FOV TGP FOV
MAV Sequence
Uncage/ Sequence Crosshair
Left De- Short FOV Change LAAP (Low AltitudeFOV Autopilot)
Change -
Video/ Consent to
Throt Btn press
Fwd Long Toggle LSS FOV Slave TGPImage Capture
to Current Steerpoint
Change LSS FOV
MAV SOI Self-Track
Forward Short Slew TAD Change Position Lights to DimStaedy / Strobes OFF
Change Slew Slew
Pinky
Slew/ Slew Slew TGP Slew TDC Slew AIM-9 Slew MAV Slew HDC
China Aft Long Cursor Exterior Lights
Slave per Lighting
All to SPI Panel Boresight Cursor
Switch
Track
Hat Center
Depress Black Out All Exterior Lights
Recage/ Recage/ Reset/Cage
Left De- Short
Short Reset LSS Reset/Cage LAAP (LowHUDAltitude
as SOIAutopilot)
Up Short Manual Manual HDC to
Aft
Throt Btn press Long
Long Cursor Toggle TDC to TVV Message Image Quick
Capture Look
Short Slew TAD HMCS as SOI Slew Slew
Slew/ DownSlew Slew TGP Slew TDC Slew AIM-9 Slew MAV Slew HDC
Coolie Long
Long Cursor Display DSMSSlave TGP toStatus
Weapon Current Steerpoint
Page & Selected Profile
Boresight Cursor
Track
Switch Forward
Short
Depress Position Lights
CycletoLeft
DimStaedy
MFCD Page / Strobes OFF
Pinky Left
AftLong
Short Exterior Lights
Left per
MFCD
HUD as SOILighting
as SOI Panel
Switch Up
Center
Short
Long Cycle
Black OutRight
All MFCD
Exterior
Message Quick Look Page
Lights
Right
Left De- Long
Short
Short Right
LAAP (Low MFCD
Altitude
HMCS asAutopilot)
as SOI SOI
Down
Throt Btn
Coolie press Long
Long Display DSMS WeaponImage Capture
Status Page & Selected Profile
Switch Short Slew TAD Cycle Left MFCD Page Slew Slew
Slew/ Left Slew Slew TGP Slew TDC Slew AIM-9 Slew MAV Slew HDC
Long Cursor Left MFCD as SOI Boresight Cursor
Track
Short
Depress Cycle Right MFCD Page 224
Right
Long
Short Right
HUDMFCD as SOI
as SOI
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE
WARTHOG
The DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) replaces the old A-10A Armament Control Panel (ACP). All of the settings for weapons, release parameters, and control of the various types of
armament are now handled using the DSMS pages on an MFCD.
A-10C
The DSMS provides you with an overall display of weapons status, inventory of each station on the aircraft, which stations are selected, the arm state, status of the GAU-8 gun, and what profile is
currently selected for each weapon.
The DSMS also contains a separate page that provides you the ability to view, select, and control profiles and delivery parameters such as interval and ripple settings for appropriate weapon types.
Each of these combinations is called a profile. These weapon profiles can either be selected from the DSMS page or selected as a rotary HUD selection from the HOTAS. The DSMS provides
selective jettison options and parameters for each weapon, rack, launcher, or station. DSMS also has a set of pages used to control settings mode, power, and boresighting functions for AGM-65
and AIM-9 missiles.
Station 11
2 x AIM-9 Missiles
Station 9 Station 8
3 x MK82AIR Bombs CBU-105
Station 5
CBU-97
Station 4
MK-82 Bomb
Station 10
LITENING Station 3
Targeting Pod 2 x AGM-65H Maverick
Station 1
Station 7 Station 6 Station 2 225
ALQ-131 ECM Pod
GBU-38 JDAM TK600 Fuel Tank 7 x M-156 Rockets
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE
WARTHOG
The DSMS is accessed by pressing the lower OSB (Option Select Button) next to DSMS. The DSMS is divided in the following sub-pages:
• Status Page
A-10C
• Profile Main Page

• Profile Control Page
• Profile Settings Page
• Inventory Main Page
• Inventory Select Page

• Inventory Class Page
• Inventory Store Type Page

• Inventory Store Select DSMS
STATUS Page
• Selective Jettison Page DSMS
INVENTORY SELECT Page
• Missile Control Page
DSMS Page Select OSB
DSMS
DSMS
MISSILE CONTROL Page
SELECTIVE JETTISON Page
226
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE Store Type Quantity
WARTHOG
Color coding represents the status of the weapon.
Station Number Weapon Status
• White: Master Arm is set to SAFE. When in SAFE mode, all systems behave as if in ARM mode but no
A-10C
weapons or flares will be released. However, if Maverick is selected, no video is shown.

Launcher/Config
• Blue: Master Arm is set to TRAIN. This is a simulated mode in which “virtual” weapons can be loaded on
Shown: LAU117 Rack
the aircraft. TRAIN profiles will not show any mismatch errors from what is in the profile and what is
detected as loaded on the aircraft.
• Green: Master Arm is set to ARM.
Gun Arming Switch
• Red: A red indication means that the profile and the inventory have conflicting information for what is
loaded on the station. Additionally, the station may be red if the weapon profile for that station has
invalid settings. Master Arm Switch
Green: Weapon is selected White: Weapon is selected

Blue: Weapon is selected
and Master Arm ON and Master Arm SAFE
and Master Arm TRAIN
Gun Status, Ammunition Count & Type Gun Status, Ammunition Count & Type
Shown: Gun armed, 1150 rounds, combat mix Shown: Gun SAFE, 1150 rounds, combat mix 227
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY
WARTHOG
When a ground crew re-arms the A-10’s stations, the ground crew installs a new Data Transfer Cartridge (DTC) containing
all the information relevant to the ordnance you have loaded on the aircraft pylons. However, the DSMS (Digital Stores
Management System) needs to re-load the Data Cartridge in order to update the weapon data in its stations.
A-10C
DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

DSMS LOADED CORRECTLY
228
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY
WARTHOG 1
Here is the procedure to re-load the DSMS correctly after the ground
crew has re-armed your aircraft.
A-10C
1. Select any page on the right MFCD

2. Click and hold “MSG” OSB until you see the DISPLAY PROGRAM
page appear
3. Click on “Load” OSB on the right menus.
4. Click on lower “MSG” OSB. OSB will replace the “MSG” page with
the “LOAD” page.
5. Click on the new lower “LOAD” OSB menu. This will select the DTS
UPLOAD (Data Transfer System) page.
2a
2b 3
4b
5
4a 229
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY DSMS LOADED CORRECTLY
WARTHOG
6. Click on “LOAD ALL” OSB on the right to reload all DSMS
stations.
7. While DTC loading is in process, all asterisks near menus
A-10C
being reloaded will disappear.

8. When DTC loading is complete, asterisks will appear next
to every menu and DSMS page will be available and
updated with the correct ordnance.
8
6
7 8
Not Loaded
Loading Loading
In Progress Complete
230
1.5 – MASTER MODES
WARTHOG
There are five master HUD (Heads-Up Display) modes that you can cycle through using the Master Mode Control
Button on the control stick.
A-10C
• NAV: Navigation data only with no weapon delivery symbology.

• GUNS: Select and display multiple gunsight options.
• CCIP: Bombing symbology for Continuously Computed Impact Point delivery including Consent to Release
(CR) modes. Maverick delivery also uses the CCIP mode.
• CCRP: Bombing symbology for Continuously Computed Release Point delivery for illumination flares,
unguided bombs, laser-guided bombs, and Inertially Aided Munitions (IAM).
• AIR-TO-AIR: Display symbology for Air-to-Air gun and AIM-9 missile.
• Air-to-Air mode can only be selected by holding the Master Mode Control Button for about 3 seconds.
Master Mode
Master Mode
Master Mode Control

Button (MMCB)
231
1.5 – MASTER MODES
WARTHOG
A-10C
CCIP Master Mode

CCRP Master Mode
GUNS Master Mode
NAV Master Mode

AIR-TO-AIR Master Mode
232
1.6 – BOMB DELIVERY MODE - CCRP VS CCIP
WARTHOG
There are 2 ways to deliver bombs: CCRP or CCIP modes.
CCIP mode is the traditional dive bombing approach: you dive on target and the reticle will tell
A-10C
you where the bomb will impact.
However, dive bombing is a risky business, especially if anti-air defences are surrounding your
target. The lower you go, the more vulnerable you are. This is why CCRP release mode was
invented.
CCRP mode allows you to fly straight and level without having to dive down. The HUD will tell
you when to release your bomb for the target you have designated with your Targeting Pod
(TGP). It is a much safer way to release a bomb, but as you may have guessed already, it is a bit
less precise.
Using CCRP or CCIP is up to you and the situation you are in. Some pilots prefer to use CCIP,
while others would not touch CCRP with a 10-ft pole. Both delivery modes work, and only CCIP: Continuously Computed Impact Point
experience will teach you what you prefer to use, and in which situations. As shown previously,
CCRP or CCIP delivery can be set throughout the DSMS during the PREFLIGHT phase.
Your delivery mode can be set throughout your DSMS in your weapon profiles.
CCRP: Continuously Computed Release Point

233
1.7 – PROCEDURES SUMMARY
WARTHOG
These are the steps you must do in order to fire a weapon.
1. Select a weapon using your DSMS.
A-10C
2. Select weapon profile: make the HUD SOI (Sensor of Interest) with Coolie Hat Switch UP, then press the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right to cycle between weapon profiles.
3. Arm selected weapon and sensors
4. Select bomb delivery mode if applicable (CCIP or CCRP)
5. Use one of your sensors (by making it SOI) to find a target, move your SPI over your target, slave all your sensors to the SPI/target and lock it.
6. Fire weapon when you have a firing solution.
An excellent weapons tutorial by Robert Sogomonian

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-MDNcdFJ8x0
Note: Rob10 from the DCS forums did a couple of lists and detailed procedures on how to use each weapon type. These charts are listed at the end of this section, so I recommend that you
print them out. This is good, useful stuff.
There is also another tutorial by Sim that shows weapon employments with lots of pretty pictures.
http://simhq.com/forum/ubbthreads.php/topics/3171145/How_to_use_weapons_Picture_gui.html#Post3171145
234
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG
235
A-10C
236
A-10C
237
A-10C
238
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE 5
A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)

2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Select MK-82 Bomb (green when selected) 3
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
3
Selected Station
239
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
8b 9b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C
5. Set CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) Mode

6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Bomb Drop
• PRS (Pairs): Bombs dropped in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will release the set 8a
number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will release the 9a
number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail)
8. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC scratchpad (2),
then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
9. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the desired distance on the UFC
scratchpad (75), then pressing the OSB next to FT.
10. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.
8c
9c
10
5
240
17b
A-10C
11. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in mils) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment). Value must be
between -15 and +15 mils.
12. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in mils) on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). Value must be between -
15 and +15 mils. 17a
13. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10 and +30 ft/sec.
14. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the
OSB next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40. 18
15. Select desired Escape Maneuver Type
• NONE: No Escape Maneuver
• CLB: Climbing Maneuver
• TRN: Turn Maneuver
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver
11
16. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired Time of Fall (in sec) of the bomb from release time to
15
impact time, enter ToF value on the UFC scratch pad, then press on the OSB next to DES TOF.
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display, enter 12
Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT. 16
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.
13
14
17c
241
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C
19. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different weapon
profiles available.
20. Select MK-82 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press on
the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and stations
using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right. 20
21. The MK-82 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display. DMS Switch
MK-82 Weapon Profile
Stations Selected
20b
20a
20d
20c
242
A-10C
22. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Left Clicking
on the switch. 23
23. Select CCIP CONSENT option with the SEL Rocker Key.
24. If CCIP CONSENT option is not in “OFF”, use the DATA rocker key to cycle between modes until 24
“OFF” is displayed.
25. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Right Clicking on the switch. The Heads-Up Display will
revert to its normal state.
25b 24 23
22
25a
243
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
26. Press the Master Mode button until the CCIP HUD Mode is selected.
27. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.
28. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, MK-82 profile and ARM
status are displayed.
26b
HUD is SOI
28
26a
Master Mode Switch
27
Coolie Hat Switch
244
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE 33
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
29. Perform a shallow dive between 10 and 45 deg from at least 10000 ft.
30. A dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line) will appear when you are not yet close enough to the
target (the aiming pipper is currently positioned too low to be visible on the HUD).
31. When you are close enough to the target, the CCIP Bombing Reticle will come into view from the bottom of the HUD
and the PBIL will turn from dashed to solid.
32. Place the center of the CCIP Bombing Reticle on the target.
33. Press and hold the Weapon Release Button (RALT+SPACE) to release bombs.
31
30
Dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL Time of Fall Solid PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line)
(Projected Bomb Impact Line) (TOF, in sec)
CCIP Bombing Reticle
Target
Analog Range Indicator
245
A-10C
CCIP Gun Cross (Range in

nm under cross)
MRS (Minimum Range Staple)

PBIL indicates the set minimum escape range of the selected profile as
(Projected Bomb Impact Line) set in DSMS
Desired Release Cue

Mach Airspeed Indicator Desired time of fall as entered in the DSMS weapon profile (DES TOF)
CCIP Bomb Reticle

Time-of-Fall (TOF) Display
Release Mode
MRC (Minimum Range Caret)
Profile Name
Weapon Status Indicator
Selected Stations
Analog Range Bar

5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
246
A-10C
247
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE 5
The Consent Release (CR) mode allows you to designate a target much as you would attack it with a CCIP
A-10C
3
Manual Release attack, and then pull up out of the attack with the target well below the HUD lower field
of view. This can be a useful delivery when you want to reduce the time you are in an attack dive and it
allows you to start your escape maneuver earlier.
There are two CR modes: 3/9 (named after the 3 o’clock and 9 o’clock positions on the reticle) and 5 MIL. 3
• If 3/9 is selected, the Solution Cue simply needs to pass through the reticle.
• If 5-MIL is selected, you must maneuver the aircraft such that the solution cue passes through the
pipper of the reticle.
A: SELECT WEAPON

3. Select MK-82 Bomb (green when selected)
Image taken from Crash Laobi’s CCIP-CR Tutorial Solution Cue and TTRN (Time
to Release Numeric)
1
CCIP Reticle
3 o’clock position 3 o’clock position 248

WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
8b 9b
A-10C

6. Set Release Type
8c
9c
10 5
249
17b
A-10C
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver 11
15
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display, enter 12
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile. 13
14
17c
250
A-10C
profiles available.
20. Select MK-82 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press on
using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right.
20
21. The MK-82 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display. DMS Switch
Stations Selected
20b
20a
20d
20c
251
A-10C
22. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Left
Clicking on the switch. 23
23. Select CCIP CONSENT option with the SEL Rocker Key.
24. If CCIP CONSENT option is in “OFF”, use the DATA rocker key to cycle between modes
until either “3/9” or “5 MIL” is displayed. 24
• 3/9 means the solution cue must pass through the reticle
• 5 mils means the solution cue must pass over the reticle pipper
25. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Right Clicking on the switch. The Heads-Up
Display will revert to its normal state.
25b
24 23
22
25a
252
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
28. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, MK-82 profile and ARM
26b
HUD is SOI
28
26a
Master Mode Switch
27
Coolie Hat Switch
253
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE 33
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
30. When you are pitched down more than 3 degrees, a dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line) will appear when you are not yet
close enough to the target (the aiming pipper is currently positioned too low to be visible on the HUD).
31. Maneuver the aircraft to place the designation pipper over the intended target and then press and HOLD the weapon release button
(RALT+SPACE).
32. With the weapon release button held down, the PBIL will turn solid and an Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) will appear along the heading to the
designated target. On the ASL a small circle will appear called the Solution Cue and next to the cue is the Time To Release Numeric (TTRN).
33. As you fly to the target along the ASL, the Solution Cue and ASL will start to drop down on the HUD. If 3/9 is selected, the Solution Cue simply
needs to pass through the reticle.
34. With the weapon release button still held down and the Solution Cue passing through the pipper / reticle, the bomb(s) will automatically be
released.
32 – Weapon Release Button HELD Solid PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line)
Dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL

(Projected Bomb Impact Line)
Solution Cue and TTRN (Time

to Release Numeric)
ASL (Azimuth Steering Line)

CCIP Bombing Reticle
Designation Pipper
9 o’clock position 3 o’clock position
31 – Weapon Release Button NOT HELD
254
Target
A-10C
Solution Cue TTRN (Time to

Release Numeric)
Projected Bomb
Impact Line (PBIL) CCIP CR Bombing HUD, In Solution, Pre-release
Release Mode
Profile Name
Projected Bomb
Azimuth Steering
Impact Line (PBIL)
Line (ASL)
Designation Pipper
CCIP Bomb Reticle

CCIP CR Bombing HUD, Out of Solution
CCIP CR Bombing HUD, Target Designated
Solution Cue and

TTRN (Time to Reticle and Pipper
Release Numeric)
255
A-10C
256
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
4
A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

3. Select MK-82AIR Bomb (green when selected)
3
257
8b 9b
A-10C
5. Set CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode

6. Set Release Type
7. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail).
• The Fuze setting will determine whether the bomb is released in “slick” (high drag
ballute assembly NOT deployed) or “retarded” (high drag ballute assembly deployed)
mode.
• To drop as a slick, select only a nose fuze.
• To release retarded, select nose/tail or tail fuze setting in the DSMS profile.
9. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the desired distance on the UFC 6
7
8c
9c
10 5
258
17b
A-10C
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver 15 11
16. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired HD (High Drag) or a LD (Low Drag) Time of Fall (in sec)
of the bomb from release time to impact time, enter ToF value on the UFC scratch pad, then
12
press on the OSB next to HD TOF or LD TOF. We will leave those at 0.
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display, enter
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile. 17c
14
16
259
A-10C
profiles available.
20. Select MK-82APO profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press
on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
20
21. The MK-82APO Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display. DMS Switch
Stations Selected
20b
20a 20d
20c
260
D (OPTION 1):
A-10C
DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH HUD TDC AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)
22. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is selected.
23. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD 27
is SOI. TMS Switch
24. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that 5 MIL mode, CCIP release, MK-82APO profile and ARM status are
displayed.
25. By default, the TDC (Target Designation Cue) is caged on the Total Velocity Vector (TVV). 26
26. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TDC to the desired target location. 23a Slew Switch
27. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to make the current TDC location the SPI Coolie Hat Switch 22a
(Sensor Point of Interest). Master Mode Switch
TVV (Total Velocity Vector) Tadpole (direction to SPI)

25 TDC (Target Designation Cue) Caged
in TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
26
HUD is SOI 23b
TDC (Target
22b
Designation Cue)
TDC is the SPI
24
27
TDC is the SPI 261

D (OPTION 2):
A-10C
DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH TARGETING POD AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)
23. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod.
24. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode. 23
25. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
24b
22a
Master Mode Switch
22b 25b
25a
262
Coolie Hat Switch 24a
D (OPTION 2):
A-10C
DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH TARGETING POD AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)
26c
26. Designate target with the Targeting Pod Targeting Pod Reticle
a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target.
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: In the TGP page, press the OSB next to B-S (Boresight Function)
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will toggle tracking modes between TGP Sensor Point of Interest Designated
AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving target).
f) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
g) Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
27. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that 5 MIL mode, CCIP release, MK-82APO profile and ARM status are displayed.
23a
26c
26d
DMS Switch
26e / 26f
TMS Switch
26e
26c
26a Slew Switch 26f
Boat Switch 26b / 26c / 26g TGP SPI Designated
30b
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE Weapon Release Button
E: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
29. Fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL) with the ASL.
The CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line).
30. At about 6 seconds on the TTRN, the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. Press and hold down the
Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) and maneuver the aircraft so that the Solution Cue falls through
the CCRP pipper.
31. Bombs will automatically release once the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
29 30a 30c
Solution Cue
Projected Bomb Solution Cue &

Release Line (PBRL) ASL (Azimuth TTRN (Time to Release
Steering Line) Numeric) (seconds)
TOF (Time-of-Fall)
Display (seconds) Bomb is just about to drop
CCRP Pipper
MRC (Minimum
Range Caret)
Analog Range Bar
5 o’clock = 5000 ft 264
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
A-10C
Solution Cue Projected Bomb

Release Line (PBRL)
ASL (Azimuth MRS (Minimum

Steering Line) Range Staple)
CCRP Bomb Reticle TTRN (Time to Release

Numeric) (seconds)
DRC (Desired
Release Cue)
MRC (Minimum
TOF (Time-of-Fall) Range Caret)
Display (seconds)
Weapon Release
Mode
Weapon Profile
Name
Weapon Status
Indicator
Selected Stations
Analog Range Bar

12 o’clock = 12000 ft
265
A-10C
31 266
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE 5
A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

3. Select M-151 Hydra 70 Rockets (green when selected)
1
3
3
Selected Stations
267
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE
7b
A-10C

6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Rocket Launch
• PRS (Pairs): Rockets launched in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the set
number of rockets set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
7a
• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the number
of rockets specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. If required, set Rocket Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC scratchpad
(2), then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
8. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify rocket settings.
7c
8
5
268
11b
A-10C
9. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in mils)
on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment). Value must be
10. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in mils) on the
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). Value must be
between -15 and +15 mils. 11a
11. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display,
enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
12
10
11c
269
A-10C
profiles available.
14. Select M-151 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press on
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and stations 14
DMS Switch
15. The M-151 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
M-151 Weapon Profile
Stations Selected
14b
14d
14a
14c
270
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
18. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, M-151 profile and ARM
16b
HUD is SOI
18
16a
Master Mode Switch
17
Coolie Hat Switch
271
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE 22
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
20. A CCIP Rocket Reticle & Pipper will appear when you are not yet close enough to the target
21. When the slant range to target is less than 2 nm, the range numeric under the CCIP reticle is removed and the analog range bar within the
reticle starts to unwind. Place the center of the CCIP Reticle on the target.
22. At a slant range of around 1 nm, hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to launch rockets.
CCIP Rocket Reticle
Pipper
Analog Range Bar

Numeric Range (nm) 12 o’clock = 12000 ft
Rocket Time of Flight (sec)

Rocket Selected
272
20 21
A-10C
CCIP RELEASE MODE
273
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION
The GAU-8/A Avenger 30 mm gun is the bread and butter of the A-10. Using seven barrels in a rotating Gatling-type system, a very high rate of fire can be achieved without excessive barrel heating.
A-10C
This is because as one barrel fires the other six are briefly cooling down. Each of the seven barrels acts as an individual 30 mm cannon with its own breech and bolt, these are all joined around a
single rotor along a common axis using a hydraulic motor.
274
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) Gun CCIP Pipper
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: AMMUNITION Upper Dot: Impact point of armor-piecing rounds
Lower Dot: Impact point of HEI rounds
The GAU-8 gun can carry three types of ammunition:
A-10C
• Combat Mix (CM). One PGU-13 High Explosive Incendiary (HEI) for every five rounds of PGU-14 Armor
Piercing Incendiary (API) rounds. The API round uses Depleted Uranium (DU). This is the ammunition of
choice for armored vehicles and can destroy a tank out to 21,600 ft.
• High Explosive Incendiary (HEI). This load exclusively uses the PGU-13 (HEI) round.
• Target Practice (TP). Inert warhead round version used for training.
Ammunition types can be set via the Mission Editor. The IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer)
Test Menu can adjust the gunsight reticle properties based on the ammunition type.
Ammunition Type
Number of Rounds &

Gunsight Ammunition Type Property
275
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: AMMUNITION 2c, 3b, 5c, 6c
ENT Button
If we have a specific ammunition type (i.e. HEI) loaded, we can modify the gunsight ammunition type
A-10C
4b
property through the IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) Test Menu since different
DATA Rocker
ammunition types have different effective ranges. 2a, 5a, 6a
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Left Clicking on SEL Rocker
the switch.
2. Use SEL rocker switch to select WEAPONS menu, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
3. Select 30MM menu by pressing ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
4. In the “AMMO TYPE” field, press the DATA rocker switch to toggle between CM (Combat Mix), HEI
(High Explosive Indenciary) and TP (Target Practice).

5. Once the desired ammo type is selected, select STORE menu with the SEL rocker switch, then press
ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
6. Select EXIT with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
7. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Right Clicking on the Switch.
8. The DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page and HUD (Heads-Up Display) will both display
the selected ammunition type.
4a
3a 4c
2b
8
Number of Rounds & Type
5b 6b
276
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: RETICLES
The gun can use four gunsight modes. These can be cycled using DMS (Data Management Switch) Left or Right Short when the HUD is SOI (Sensor of
A-10C
Interest).
• CCIP Reticle: Provides the most accurate firing solution.
• CCIP Cross: Simplified CCIP reticle but almost just as accurate
• 4/8/12 Reticle: Less accurate than CCIP reticles, the top dot represents a 4000 ft slant range, the middle dot a 8000 ft slant range, and the bottom
dot a 12000 ft slant range. Less accurate than other reticle types, but useful in case you can’t get CCIP solution computed due to inaccurate
elevation data (CCIP INVALID HUD message. Which indicates that the target is at an elevation higher than the aircraft).
DMS Switch
• 4000 ft Wind Corrected Cross: Cross is set for a 4000 ft wind corrected slant range. Less accurate than other reticle types, but useful in case you
can’t get CCIP solution computed due to inaccurate elevation data (CCIP INVALID HUD message. Which indicates that the target is at an elevation
higher than the aircraft).
277
CCIP Reticle CCIP Cross 4/8/12 Reticle 4000 ft Wind Corrected Cross Reticle
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: RETICLE MINIMUM ALTITUDE 2c, 3b, 6c
ENT Button
If a MIN ALT (Minimum Altitude to fire the guns safely) other than 0 has been entered in the IFFCC 30 MM menu, the
A-10C
5a, 7c
Minimum Range Cue indicator will appear to the right of the reticle. The MIN ALT setting is calibrated to when the cue is
DATA Rocker
at the 3 o’clock position of the reticle. 2a, 4a, 6a, 7a
SEL Rocker
To modify a Minimum Altitude through the IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) Test Menu: 9
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Left Clicking on the switch.
2. Use SEL rocker switch to select WEAPONS menu, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad. 9
3. Select 30MM menu by pressing ENT on the UFC scratchpad. Minimum Range Cue
4. Use SEL rocker switch to select MIN ALT menu.

5. In the “MIN ALT” field, press the DATA rocker switch to increment MIN ALT value until you reach the desired value.
6. Once the minimum altitude is set, select STORE menu with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the UFC
scratchpad.
7. Select EXIT with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
8. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Right Clicking on the Switch.
9. The CCIP Reticle will then display the Minimum Range Cue.
3a
4b
2b
1
5b
7b 8
6b
278
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) Gun Bore Line Cross
WARTHOG 2.4.2 – CCIP RETICLE
A-10C
2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to ARM (UP)

3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure the EAC
(Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW SAS (Stability 5
6 GUNS Master Mode
Augmentation System) switches are ON.
HUD is SOI
5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode is
selected.
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI
(Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI. 5
7 Master Mode Button
7. Press the DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT or RIGHT to cycle
DMS Switch
between Gun Modes until the Gun CCIP Reticle is visible.
7
CCIP Reticle
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch


Control) Switch
1 279
2
WARTHOG 2.4.2 – CCIP RETICLE Note:
If the target is moving, you may want to use the moving target indices on the CCIP Gun Reticle. They assume lead
8. Put target under reticle for a moving target at a constant speed of 20 knots perpendicular. For example: if a target is moving left to right at
A-10C
an estimated 10 knots, place target half way between the pipper and left moving target indices before firing.
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and stabilize
flight
10. Wait until target slant range is 0.7 nm
11. Depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun burst
CCIP Pipper Moving Target Indice

Upper Dot: Impact point of armor-piecing rounds
Lower Dot: Impact point of HEI rounds
Moving Target Indice Analog Range Bar

12 o’clock = 12000 ft
Numeric Range (nm)
Round Type / Round Counter

CM: Combat Mix
Weapon Status
Indicator
9 / 11
Gun Trigger
First Detent: Activates PAC and stabilizes flight
Second Detent: Fires gun 280
WARTHOG 2.4.3 – CCIP CROSS
A-10C

(Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW SAS (Stability
Augmentation System) switches are ON. 6
5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode is HUD is SOI
selected.
(Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI. 5
DMS Switch
between Gun Modes until the Gun CCIP Cross Reticle is visible.
7
CCIP Cross

6
3
Coolie Hat Switch


Control) Switch
1 281
2
WARTHOG 2.4.3 – CCIP CROSS
8. Put target under reticle CCIP Cross
A-10C
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and stabilize flight
10. Wait until target slant range is 0.7 nm
Numeric Range (nm)

CM: Combat Mix
Weapon Status
Indicator
9 / 11
Gun Trigger
WARTHOG 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 RETICLE
A-10C

6
HUD is SOI
selected.
(Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI. 5 5
7 Master Mode Button GUNS Master Mode
DMS Switch
between Gun Modes until the Gun 4/8/12 Reticle is visible.
7
4/8/12 Reticle
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch


Control) Switch
1 283
2
WARTHOG 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 RETICLE
8. We generally use the 4/8/12 reticle for targets that are above our
A-10C
current altitude (on a sloped hill for instance). Evaluate your target’s Target (Uphill, above us)
distance, then put target under pipper of the desired range.
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and stabilize 4000 ft Slant Range Pipper
flight
10. When you are in range and the corresponding Range Pipper is on the
target, depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun Gun Bore Line Cross
burst
8000 ft Slant Range Pipper
4/8/12 Reticle
12000 ft Slant Range Pipper

CM: Combat Mix
Weapon Status
Indicator
9/10
Gun Trigger
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) 7
4000 ft Wind Corrected
WARTHOG 2.4.5 – 4000 FT WIND CORRECTED CROSS Cross Reticle

A-10C

3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible 6
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure the EAC HUD is SOI
selected.
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI 5
(Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI. 5 GUNS Master Mode
DMS Switch
between Gun Modes until the Gun 4000 Ft Wind Corrected Cross
Reticle is visible.

6
3
Coolie Hat Switch


Control) Switch
1 285
2
WARTHOG 2.4.5 – 4000 FT WIND CORRECTED CROSS
8. We generally use the 4000 ft cross for targets that are above our current Target (Uphill, above us)
A-10C
altitude (on a sloped hill for instance). Evaluate your target’s distance, then
put target under 4000 ft cross.
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and stabilize flight 4000 ft Wind Corrected cross
10. When you are in range and the corresponding Range Pipper is on the target, (align on target)
depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun burst

CM: Combat Mix
Weapon Status
Indicator
9/10
Gun Trigger
A-10C
287
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
The JTAC (Joint Tactical Air Controller) is the radio operator that finds targets for you and requests air strikes. He is the main line of communication between the grunts on the ground and yourself.
A-10C
Here is an example by Ranger79: https://youtu.be/riIChrLLJqY?list=LLKDCQ2Y6CtqCjKceXO1J6hg
Performing a successful JDAM (Joint Directed Attack Munition) strike with the help of a JTAC is done in the following manner:
A. Find the JTAC radio frequency and request a fire mission. Then, enter coordinates in the CDU (Control Display Unit) for a new waypoint.
B. Set up a weapon profile, select it and arm the GBU-38 JDAM
C. Designate the waypoint with the target coordinates entered earlier as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
D. Perform the attack and launch the JDAM, which will home on the target by itself.
288
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM 7b
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES) 2b
A: ENTER JTAC TARGET COORDINATES

A-10C
1. Set required JTAC frequency (UHF 245.00 MHz).

2. Press “HOTAS MIC SWITCH DOWN” to communicate on UHF radio and select JTAC – Axeman11 (F4)
in radio menu.
3. Select “CHECK-IN 15 MIN” (F1) 8
4. You will contact the JTAC and give him your altitude and ordnance available, plus your time available
on station.
5. JTAC will answer “Type 3 in effect” and ask you when you are ready to receive a 9-line. 9
6. Select “READY TO COPY” (F1) to receive 9-line.
7. The JTAC will give you the 9-line and ask you when you are ready for remarks.
8. Select “READY TO COPY REMARKS” (F1)
9. JTAC will give you remarks. 3
10. Select “9-LINE READBACK” to repeat the information you have been given and confirm it with the
JTAC.
11. JTAC will confirm your readback, send you a JTAC transmission and clear you to engage target.
10a
4
10b
5
11
6
1
Microphone Switch
• FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM) 2a 7a
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM) 289
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
What is a CAS (Close Air Support) 9-line and why is it important? The goal of a 9-line is to
A-10C
provide you as much information as concisely as possible.
9-line
Line 1: IP/BP – Initial Point/Battle Position (N/A in our case)

Line 2: Heading from the IP to the Target (N/A in our case)
Line 3: Distance from the IP/BP to target (N/A in our case)
Line 4: Target elevation – 23 feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL)

Line 5: Target description: Truck.
Line 6: Target location: Grid coordinates of target (UTM coordinates DQ083998)
Line 7: Target Mark Type: No Mark
Line 8: Location of Friendlies: JTAC located 800 meters Southeast of Target
Line 9: Egress semi-cardinal direction when departing from target: West
Remarks
Remarks generally include information about troops in contact or danger close, SEAD
support in effect, hazards, weather or other threats. In our case, the JTAC wants us to use
GBU-38 JDAMs.
JTAC TASKING:
When the JTAC mentions “Standby Data”, a NEW TASKING transmission is sent to the MSG
(Message) page.
• Click on the OSB next to MSG to access the Message page.
• Click on the OSB next to ACK (Acknowledge) to clear the caution.
290
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
The target coordinates given to us by the JTAC, which are given in “UTM” (Universal Transverse Mercator) format.
A-10C
291
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
We have currently 3 existing waypoints. We will create a 4th waypoint with the target in “UTM” (Universal Transverse
A-10C
Mercator) format. The UTM coordinates of the target are DQ083998.
Target
Waypoint 3 JTAC
(Friendly)
You
Waypoint 2
Waypoint 1
292
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
A: ENTER JTAC TARGET COORDINATES
A-10C
12. Enter target coordinates in CDU (Control Display Unit)

a) Set STEER PT selector to MISSION and PAGE selector to OTHER
b) Select WP (Waypoint) FSK (Function Select Key) 12e
12a
c) Select LSK (Line Select Key) next to STEERPOINT
d) Select LSK next to ?4 to create Waypoint 4. 12a
e) Select LSK next to L/L to toggle the coordinate format to UTM
f) On CDU keypad, enter target coordinates given by the JTAC: 12c
“DQ083998”.
g) Select LSK next to DQ coordinates to modify Waypoint 4 coordinates
with the ones you just entered. 12f
h) On CDU keypad, enter name of the waypoint (we will call it “JTAC1”).
i) Select LSK next to MSN004 to rename Waypoint 4.
j) And that’s it! Waypoint 4 is now created with the coordinates provided
by the JTAC.
12b 12g
12c
12d
12h
12i
12f 12h
293
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
13
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

15. Select GBU-38 Bomb (green when selected)
17. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode is the only selectable mode
18. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings. 19b
Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
16
19a
15
20
19c
17
18
294
14
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
A-10C
21. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
22. Select GBU-38 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and
stations using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right.
23. The GBU-38 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
22
DMS Switch
23 GBU-38 Weapon Profile
22b
22a 22d
22c
295
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES) A-10C Legacy HUD
Symbology
(A-10C LEGACY SYMBOLOGY) 28b
A-10C
C: SELECT TARGET WAYPOINT & SET IT AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST)

24. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
25. Select Waypoint 4/JTAC1 using the STEER rocker switch or the DMS (Data
Management Switch) UP/DOWN. 27 SPI
26. If STPT is not the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press the TMS (Target
Management System) Switch AFT LONG to set the current selected steerpoint
(4/JTAC1) as the SPI.

27. With Steerpoint 4/JTAC1 set as the Sensor Point of Interest, we can now perform 25
the JDAM strike
HUD is SOI 24
26
25
26
TMS Switch
25
24 DMS Switch 28a
Master Mode Switch
32 Only
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES) Weapon Release Button
(A-10C LEGACY SYMBOLOGY)

A-10C
D: PERFORM ATTACK
29. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the
aircraft to align the middle of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
30. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock position of the CCRP
Reticle counter clockwise.
31. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range Caret, MAN REL will
appear in the In Range Indication field.

32. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until JDAM is released.
33. The JDAM will home on the target coordinates by itself, guided by its own embedded GPS.
29a 29b
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
Maximum Range Caret
Release Cue / Analog Range Bar
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
CCRP Reticle
MAN REL (Manual Release)

In Range Indication
Selected Waypoint
Minimum Range Caret

Waypoint 4/JTAC1
297
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM A-10C II Tank Killer
32 Expansion Only
TANK KILLER (JTAC COORDINATES) Weapon Release Button
(A-10C II TANK KILLER SYMBOLOGY)

A-10C II
D: PERFORM ATTACK
29. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the velocity
vector with the ASL.
30. The DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) current range and caret indication will move down from above the DLZ.
31. Once the current range caret is between the maximum and minimum range indication on the DLZ, the weapon may be released. MAN
REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
DLZ Maximum Range Indication
DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone)
DLZ Current Range to Target Velocity Vector

Indication (nm)
DLZ Minimum Range Caret
Time to Target (No R)
Waypoint 4/JTAC1
In Range Indication
Time to Maximum Range (R)
Selected Waypoint
298
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
NOTE:
A-10C
Launching a JDAM at blind coordinates is not recommended; you should always

make sure to have a visual look at the target before you decide to bomb it back to
the stone age.
Before performing the attack run, press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave
all sensors to the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), which is the Steerpoint 4/JTAC1.
The targeting pod will be slaved to the steerpoint (allowing you to give the target a
proper look) and the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) will display where the target
point is in relationship to other waypoints.
Waypoint 4
Waypoint 3
(SPI)
Waypoint 2
Waypoint 1
TGP slaved to Waypoint 4
You
China Hat Switch

TGP Page 299
TAD Page
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
The JDAM can home on a target designated by a targeting pod. Here is a great video by Bunyap showcasing this functionality: https://youtu.be/aaFdAbODqzQ
A-10C
Here is the best method to use this:
A. Set up a weapon profile, select it and arm the GBU-38 JDAM.

B. Designate the target with the targeting pod and use the ranging laser to get an accurate range. Then, create markpoint.
C. Set markpoint as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
D. Perform the attack and launch the JDAM, which will home on the target designated by the targeting pod.
300
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
1
A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

6. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings. 7b
7a
7c
301
2
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
A-10C
10
DMS Switch
10b
10d
10a
10c
302
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD & CREATE MARKPOINT
A-10C
12. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the LASER ARM switch to ARM
(ON) as well.
13. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G (Air-to-Ground)
Mode.
14. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the 12
12
13b
14c
TGP is SOI
14a
TGP is not SOI
13a
14b
303
Coolie Hat Switch
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
A-10C
15. Designate target with the Targeting Pod

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target. 15c
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight): Targeting Pod Reticle
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: In the TGP page, press the OSB next to B-S
(Boresight Function)
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will
toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target).
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
(nm)
15d
DMS Switch
15e
TMS Switch
15e
15c
15a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 15b / 15c
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
A-10C

18. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once
fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH OFF.
20. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert” binding) to fire laser.
21. While laser is firing, press TMS (Target Management System) RIGHT SHORT to create
a markpoint based on the target position identified by the reticle and the range 21
computed by laser ranging. TMS Switch Nosewheel Steering Button 20
22. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert” binding) to stop firing laser.
22
17a
17b
TGP 19
Reticle
16
20
18
Laser is Firing
305
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
A-10C
Note: the reason why we use laser ranging WHILE designating the markpoint is that failing to do so will create a markpoint behind the target since the TGP reticle will point on the ground spot
behind the target.
Not Using Laser Ranging
Markpoint
Using Laser Ranging
Markpoint 306
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
C: SET MARKPOINT AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST)
A-10C
23. Set STEER PT selector to MARK (Markpoint) and PAGE selector to OTHER
23
24. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) 23
25. Select Steerpoint A/MRK A (Markpoint A) using the STEER rocker switch or the DMS
(Data Management Switch) UP/DOWN.
26. If STPT is not the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press the TMS (Target Management
System) Switch AFT LONG to set the current selected steerpoint (A/MRK A) as the
SPI.
27. With Steerpoint MRK A set as the Sensor Point of Interest, we can now perform the
JDAM strike
29b
28. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor Point of
Interest (SPI).
• Note for the A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: steps 23 to 26 can be performed by
pressing TMS RIGHT LONG instead.
25
HUD is SOI 24
24 Coolie Hat Switch

STPT is SPI 26
28 SPI
25
26
TMS Switch
25
DMS Switch
29a
Master Mode Switch
28 China Hat Switch 307
33 Only
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

A-10C
D: PERFORM ATTACK
30. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the
aircraft to align the middle of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
31. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock position of the
CCRP Reticle counter clockwise.
32. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range Caret, MAN REL
will appear in the In Range Indication field.


30a 30b 5 o’clock = 5000 ft
ASL (Azimuth 12 o’clock = 12000 ft Maximum Range Caret
Steering Line)
CCRP Reticle

In Range Indication
Markpoint A
Minimum Range Caret
Selected Markpoint 308

2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM A-10C II Tank Killer
33 Expansion Only
TANK KILLER (TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

A-10C II
D: PERFORM ATTACK
30. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the
velocity vector with the ASL.
32. Once the current range caret is between the maximum and minimum range indication on the DLZ, the weapon may be
released. MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
Velocity Vector
DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) DLZ Maximum Range Indication ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
DLZ Current Range to Target

Indication (nm)
Markpoint A
In Range Indication
Selected Markpoint
309
A-10C
(TARGETING POD)
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
310
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
CBUs (Cluster Bomb Units) are generally used against “soft” targets. Some of them like the CBU-103 and CBU-105 use Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser kits to correct the effect of the wind on
A-10C
their trajectory.
Keep in mind that there are two parameters that we can adjust to improve the effectiveness of CBUs:
• Height of Function (HoF), which determines at which height the bombs will release. It impacts area spread and accuracy.
• RPM, which is the area spread of the bomblets that affects the concentration of fire available on the target. This parameter is applicable to the CBU-87 and CBU-103 only. Recommended value is
experimental, but you can use a value of 1000.
CBU (Cluster Bomb Unit) Types

CBU-87: This Combined Effects Munitions (CEM) weighs 950 lbs and is an all- CBU-103: Standard CBU-87 cluster bomb fitted with an INS guidance kit to form a Wind
purpose cluster bomb. The SW-65 Tactical Munitions Dispenser contains 202 BLU- Corrected Munition Dispenser (WCMD, or “Wick Mid”). Unlike the GBU-31 and GBU-38, a
97/B Combined Effects Bomblets (CEB) and they are effective against armored and WCMD does not use GPS guidance. Rather, the WCMD system uses the aircraft’s inertial
unarmored targets. navigation system to “know” its current location and the location of the target, and then
Recommended HoF/RPM parameters: 1800 ft/1000 use the tail kit to steer the bomb to the target location.
Recommended HoF/RPM parameters: 1800 ft/1000
CBU-97: 1,000-pound class weapon containing sensor-fused sub-munitions for CBU-105: Wind Corrected Munitions Dispenser (WCMD, or “Wick Mid”) tail kit version of
specifically attacking armor. the CBU-97. Using Inertial Navigation System (INS) guidance, the CBU-105 can be dropped
Recommended HoF parameter: 2200 ft at much higher altitudes than the CBU-97 and guide to the targeted location (SPI).
Recommended HoF parameter: 2200 ft
Parameters (Applicable for CBU-87 and CBU-103) Parameters (Applicable for CBU-97 and CBU-105)
311
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD 4

A-10C

2. Select “INV” (Inventory) page
3. Select desired CBU-105 station
4. Select “INV STAT” (Inventory Station)
5. Click repeatedly on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to HOF (Height of Function/Fall) until a height
of 2200 ft is selected
6. Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station only. If you have a
symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g., 5 and 7, select LOAD SYM to load these
parameters on both CBU-105 stations.
3
2
4 312
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
7
A-10C

9. Select CBU-105 Bomb (green when selected)
12. Set Release Type (Single, Pairs, etc.) 14b
10
9 14a
12
15
14c
13 11
313
8
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
A-10C
17. Select CBU-105 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and 17
stations using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right. DMS Switch
18. The CBU-105 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
18 CBU-105 Weapon Profile
17b
17a
17d
17c
314
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C
(ON) as well.
Mode.
21. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the 19
19
20b
21c
TGP is SOI
21a
TGP is not SOI
20a
21b
315
Coolie Hat Switch
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
A-10C

• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight): 22c
• A-10C LEGACY: Press the China Hat Switch AFT SHORT Targeting Pod Reticle
target).
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
(nm)
22d
DMS Switch
22e
TMS Switch 22e
22c
22a Slew Switch
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
C: SET TARGETING POD TARGET AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST)
A-10C
23. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the 23 TGP is SOI
direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have
the TGP page on the right MFCD).
24. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to
designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
Point of Interest (SPI).
STPT is SPI 23
26
24
TMS Switch
26 25 SPI
Master Mode Switch
25 China Hat Switch 317
TGP is SPI 26
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
30
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

A-10C
D: PERFORM ATTACK
27. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the middle
of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
28. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock position of the CCRP Reticle counter
clockwise.
29. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range Caret, MAN REL will appear in the In
Range Indication field.

30. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until CBU is released.
31. At the programmed HoF (Height of Function), the dispenser will release bomblets, which will slowly descend on the target and
explode in clusters.
27a 27b
Maximum Range Caret
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
CCRP Reticle
In Range Indication
SPI
Minimum Range Caret
318
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD A-10C II Tank Killer
30 Expansion Only
TANK KILLER (CCRP + TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

A-10C II
D: PERFORM ATTACK
27. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the
velocity vector with the ASL.
29. Once the current range caret is between the maximum and minimum range indication on the DLZ, the weapon may be released.
MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
30. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until CBU is released.
31. At the programmed HoF (Height of Function), the dispenser will release bomblets, which will slowly descend on the target and
explode in clusters.
Velocity Vector
DLZ Maximum Range Indication ASL (Azimuth

Steering Line)

Indication (nm)

In Range Indication
Time to Maximum Range (R) SPI (TGP)
319
A-10C
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
(CCRP + TARGETING POD)
320
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB 4
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
5a
A: PROGRAM GBU-12 LASER CODE
A-10C

2. Select “INV” (Inventory) page
3. Select desired GBU-12 station (Station 4)
4. Select “INV STAT” (Inventory Station)
5. Enter desired GBU-12 laser code on the UFC scratchpad (i.e. 1687).
5b
6. Click on the OSB next to LSR CODE to set new laser code (1687) on the GBU.
7. Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station only. If you
have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g., 4 and 8, select LOAD SYM to
load these parameters on both GBU-12 stations.
4 321
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD) 11
B: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C
8
10
C: SET WEAPON PROFILE GBU Laser

12. Set CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode Code 1687
13. Set Release Type

• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will release the set
• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will release the
9
15. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC scratchpad,
scratchpad, then pressing the OSB next to FT. 13
14
17
12
322
25b
C: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C
18. Set Auto Laser as desired. We will laser manually, so we will leave this to OFF.
• If set to ON, the laser will fire automatically according to the LS TIME (seconds before bomb
impact). For best accuracy, set this to 8 seconds before impact. If set to 0, the laser will
default to firing 4 seconds before impact.
19. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in mils) on the
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment). Value must be between -15
and +15 mils.
20. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in mils) on the UFC 25a
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). Value must be between -15
and +15 mils.
21. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the UFC scratchpad,
then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10 and +30 ft/sec. 29
22. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB
next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40. 18
23
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver 24
25c 19
26. OPTIONAL: If AUTO LS is ON, enter how many seconds before weapon impact that wish the laser to 20
start firing on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to LS TIME. Otherwise, leave it to 0. 26
27. Select Solution Option: flight path of bomb between ORP for Optimal Release Point and BAL for
Ballistic release point 21
28. Verify all weapon profile parameters are set as desired
22
27
323
A-10C
profiles available.
31. Select GBU-12 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press on
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and stations 31
using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or right. DMS Switch
GBU-12 Weapon Profile
Stations Selected
31b
31a 31d
31c
324
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C
33. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the
LASER ARM switch to ARM (ON) as well.
34. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then,
select the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode.
35. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we 33
33
34b
35c
TGP is SOI
35a
TGP is not SOI
34a
35b
325
Coolie Hat Switch
A-10C

• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV) 36c
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot) Targeting Pod Reticle
target).
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
(nm)
36d
DMS Switch
36e
TMS Switch 36e
36c
36a Slew Switch
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD 37 TGP is SOI
A-10C
37. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the
direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have
the TGP page on the right MFCD).
STPT is SPI 37
40
39 SPI
38
TMS Switch
40
Master Mode Switch
39 China Hat Switch TGP is SPI 38 327
43a
E: LASE TARGET
A-10C

42. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter see the TGP AG Control Page.
43. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose laser code
1687, which we set previously on the GBU-12 of station 4.
44. Press on the OSB next to “L” (Laser Designation Code) to enter laser code 1687.
43b
45. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once
fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH ON.
Nosewheel Steering Button 47
Note: Normally, you would first launch the GBU-12, then fire the laser to guide the
weapon. For simplification purposes, we will lase first then attack.
42a
42b
46
41
44
45
47
Laser is Firing
328
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD) 49b
F: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
48. Fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL) with the ASL. The
CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line).
49. At about 6 seconds on the TTRN, the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. Press and hold down the
Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) and maneuver the aircraft so that the Solution Cue falls through the
CCRP pipper.
50. Bomb will automatically release once the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
51. Verify that Laser is firing (blinking “L” on the HUD). If not, press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert”
binding) to fire laser.

52. The bomb will follow the laser until it hits the target.
53. After bomb impact, press the Nosewheel Steering Button again to stop firing the laser.
51 53 Nosewheel Steering Button

Solution Cue &
39a TTRN (Time to Release 49c
48 Numeric) (seconds) Analog Range Bar
Projected Bomb 5 o’clock = 5000 ft
TOF (Time-of-Fall) 12 o’clock = 12000 ft
Release Line (PBRL)
Display (seconds)
CCRP Pipper
Bomb is dropping
Laser is Firing
“L” Blinking
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
329
A-10C
330
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) 1

2. On the right MFCD, select MAV (Maverick) page
3. Press on the OSB next to EO OFF. This will start a 3-minute alignment period for
the Maverick’s Electro-Optical system.
4. During alignment, MAV page displays ALIGN and HUD displays ALN.
5. Missile alignment is complete once ALIGN caution disappears from the MAV
page and HUD displays RDY. 4
3b
3a 4
Alignment Time
331
2
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

7. Select AGM-65 Missile (green when selected).
• When HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI, performed with Coolie Hat UP), you
can cycle between stations (A-10C LEGACY ONLY) and profiles using the DMS
(Data Management Switch) left or right. The Station will momentarily be
displayed when switching stations, then revert back to RDY. 7
DMS Switch
7a
7b 7c
HUD is SOI (Asterisk)
6
Maverick Reticle
(Caged/Boresighted)
Maverick Weapon Profile
Maverick Status: Ready 7

Maverick Station
Selected Coolie Hat Switch 332
9 Adjustment Boresight Function
B: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE Adjusts boresight position of the Maverick.
A-10C
8. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that Slew the Maverick to the desired boresight
displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV page on the position, and press the OSB next to ADJ OFF.
right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Seeker Indication With ADJ ON, the next time you cage the
9. Set Adjustment Boresight Function as required (we will leave it to OFF) Relative to Boresight missile to boresight, it will automatically cage
10. If you want to adjust the missile slew rate, you can enter the rate on to the set position.
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to SLEW. The default
slew rate is 5.0, but some users recommend 9.0.
Active Maverick
Station Number
MAV sensor is SOI

8b
(Sensor of Interest)
Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
10 Maverick Slew Rate Data Field
Maverick Seeker Center

8a
333
Coolie Hat Switch
B: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C
11. Lock target with the Maverick 11c

a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch Maverick Reticle
11f
Maverick is the SPI
c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the MAV reticle on the target.
• If required, use China Hat AFT SHORT to reset missile to its boresighted position
d) When you release the slew control, the Maverick will automatically attempt to lock onto the
center of mass of a target it detects inside the tracking gate. If it cannot lock on to a target,
after a few seconds, the seeker will go into Break Lock mode and the crosshairs will expand out
to the edges of the display.
e) Press TMS (Target Management System) switch AFT SHORT to ground stabilize the reticle.
f) Press TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to set Maverick as SPI (Sensor
Point of Interest)
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight
11e / 11f
TMS Switch
11c
11a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 11b
11d Maverick Seeker Center
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY 12
C: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
12. When missile has a good lock (generally between 3 and 7 nm), press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE)
to fire Maverick missile. LAUNCH INHIBIT message will be displayed if no valid lock is obtained when pressing the
Weapon Release button.
Note: flaps must be UP when firing a missile since it could be damaged by the missile launch.

Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm. Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic Maverick Seeker Locked on Target
Maverick Reticle
Target Range Caret

and Numeric (nm) Maverick Line of
Sight Range (nm)

minimum range.
Missile Time of Flight (sec)

MAV: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Maverick
335
A-10C
336
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
The Maverick seeker, even if it can find and lock a target by itself, has a very limited range. It is quite clunky to use just by itself. The Targeting Pod (which has a much greater range and is easier to
A-10C
operate) can be used to designate a target. A press of the China Hat Switch FWD can then slave the Maverick seeker to the TGP Sensor Point of Interest, which is quite handy since the missile will
lock the target once in range.
Here is a great video by Bunyap showcasing this functionality: https://youtu.be/MpUtNEvFXNI
Here is the best method to use the Maverick in conjunction with the Targeting Pod:
A. Prepare and arm the Maverick Missile

B. Designate the target with the targeting pod, then set it as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
C. Slave Maverick seeker to the TGP SPI, then acquire lock on target with the Maverick
D. Perform the attack and launch the Maverick
337
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) 1

3. Press on the OSB next to EO OFF. This will start a 3-minute alignment period for
the Maverick’s Electro-Optical system.
5. Missile alignment is complete once ALIGN caution disappears from the MAV page
and HUD displays RDY. 4
3b
3a 4
Alignment Time
338
2
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

7. Select AGM-65 Missile (green when selected).
• When HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI, performed with Coolie Hat UP), you
can cycle between stations (A-10C LEGACY ONLY) and profiles using the DMS
(Data Management Switch) left or right. The Station will momentarily be
displayed when switching stations, then revert back to RDY. 7
DMS Switch
7a
7b 7c
6
Maverick Reticle
(Caged/Boresighted)
Maverick Status: Ready 7

Maverick Station
Selected Coolie Hat Switch 339
A-10C
8. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod.
9. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page on the left MFCD. Then, select the A-G
(Air-to-Ground) Mode.
10. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (LEFT since we have the TGP page on the
left MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
9b
10c
TGP is SOI
10a
TGP is not SOI
10b 9a
340
Coolie Hat Switch
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR Maverick Reticle

A-10C

11c
target).
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
(nm)
11d
DMS Switch
11e
11e
TMS Switch
11c
11a Slew Switch
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD 12 TGP is SOI
A-10C
12. Verify TGP is SOI (Sensor of Interest). If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat
Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed
(RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
STPT is SPI 13a
13c SPI
13b
TMS Switch
TGP is SPI 13c

C: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C
14. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that
displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV page on the
right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Active Maverick
15. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor Station Number
Point of Interest (SPI). This will slew the Maverick missile automatically
to the point designated by the Targeting Pod, which is the current SPI.
16. Keep in mind that the Maverick has not locked a target yet. The seeker
will likely be into Break Lock mode and the crosshairs will expand out to
the edges of the display.
MAV sensor is SOI

14b
(Sensor of Interest)
Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
Expanded Break Lock

14a Crosshairs
343
Coolie Hat Switch
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV) Maverick Reticle
(Slaved on Targeting Pod SPI)
C: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C
17. Lock target with the Maverick.

a) As you approach the target, check the DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) to estimate
the range.
b) When you are in range (between 3 and 7 nm), press TMS (Target Management
System) switch FWD SHORT to attempt a lock on the target. You may need to
attempt this a couple of times.
c) Once target is locked on the Maverick, the crosshair symbology will change.
Targeting Pod is the SPI
Maverick Seeker Center

(Locked)
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight 17c
17a Maverick Seeker Center

17b
(Not Locked)
TMS Switch
344
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR 18
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C
18. When missile has a good lock (generally between 3 and 7 nm), press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE)
to fire Maverick missile. LAUNCH INHIBIT message will be displayed if no valid lock is obtained when pressing the
Weapon Release button.
Note: flaps must be UP when firing a missile since it could be damaged by the missile launch.

Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm. Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic Maverick Seeker Locked on Target
Launch Zone) Range Staple Maverick Reticle
Target Range Caret

and Numeric (nm)

minimum range.
Missile Time of Flight (sec) Maverick Line of

Sight Range (nm)

TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
345
A-10C
346
2.11 – AGM-65L LASER MAVERICK A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER TARGETING POD DESIGNATION (LASER)
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C II

3. Press on the OSB next to EO OFF. This will start a 3-minute alignment period for 1
the Maverick’s system.
5. Missile alignment is complete once ALIGN caution disappears from the MAV
page and HUD displays RDY. 4
3b
3a
5
4
Alignment Time
2 347
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER TARGETING POD DESIGNATION (LASER) 6e
B: PROGRAM MISSILE LASER CODE (VIA DSMS PAGE)

A-10C II
6. Program the laser code the Maverick missile will track. You can do this with the
DSMS page. 6e
a) Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
b) Select “INV” (Inventory) page
c) Select desired AGM-65L station (Station 9)
d) Select “INV STAT” (Inventory Station)
e) Enter desired Maverick laser code on the UFC scratchpad (i.e. 1687).
f) Click on the OSB next to CODE to set new laser code (1687) on the
AGM-65L.
g) Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this
station only. If you have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite
pylons (e.g., 3 and 9), select LOAD SYM to load these parameters on
both Maverick stations.
6f
6b 6d
6c
6g
348
6a
Expansion Only
B: PROGRAM MISSILE LASER CODE (VIA MAV PAGE)
A-10C II
6. Program the laser code the Maverick missile will track. An alternative method is to do this with the Boat Switch.
a) Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV page on the
right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
b) Move Boat Switch FWD to set the cursor under the first digit (furthest left).
c) Move Boat Switch AFT to cycle digits between 1 and 7.
d) Move Boat Switch to center to stop digit cycle.
e) Move Boat Switch FWD again to move the cursor to the next digit.
f) Move Boat Switch AFT to cycle digits between 1 and 7.

g) Repeat for other digits until four digits form “1687”, our desired Maverick laser code.
h) Once code has been set, the cursor will stop flashing.
i) After inputting the four-digit laser code, you may move the cursor to the fifth position (rightmost) and set countermeasure mode on
(when the cursor is in this position, it will not flash). This is done by cycling the Boat switch AFT. When active, a “C” will be displayed.
6a
MAV sensor is SOI (Sensor of Interest)
6a
Coolie Hat Switch
Cursor
6i
Boat Switch
349
Expansion Only
C: SELECT WEAPON & PROFILE
A-10C II

8. Select AGM-65L Missile.
• When HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI, performed with Coolie Hat
UP), you can cycle between profiles using the DMS (Data Management
Switch) left or right. The Station will momentarily be displayed when
switching stations, then revert back to RDY.
7
Coolie Hat Switch
7
Maverick Reticle
(Caged/Boresighted)

8
8a 8a
Maverick Status: Ready
8
DMS Switch
350
Expansion Only
A-10C II
9. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting
pod. Set the LASER ARM switch to ARM (ON) as well.
10. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page.
Then, select the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode.
11. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed
(LEFT since we have the TGP page on the left MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest). 9
10b
11c
TGP is SOI
11a
TGP is not SOI
11b 10a
351
Coolie Hat Switch
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER TARGETING POD DESIGNATION (LASER) 12c
A-10C II

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the
target.
• If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight): In the TGP page, press
the OSB next to B-S (Boresight Function)
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target.
This will toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK B-S (Boresight) Function
(moving target).
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
12d (nm)
DMS Switch
12e
TMS Switch
12e
12c
12a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 12b
Expansion Only
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD 13 TGP is SOI
A-10C II
13. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the
direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (LEFT since we have the
TGP page on the left MFCD).
STPT is SPI 13
Maverick Reticle
SPI
(Caged/Boresighted)
14
TMS Switch
TGP is SPI 14
353
Expansion Only
17a
E: LASE TARGET
A-10C II

17. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose laser code 1687,
which we set previously on the Maverick of station 9.
19. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once fired
by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH ON.
20. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page. 17b
16a
16b
20
15
18
19
21
Laser is Firing
354
Expansion Only
F: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C II
22. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV
page on the right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
23. Uncage the missile by pressing TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT. This is termed the “Activate” mode.
24. Upon entering “Activate” mode, the seeker will begin searching for a laser designation matching that of the entered PRF
code along its boresight line of sight (81 mils). If it detects laser energy along this line of sight at the set PRF (Pulse
Repetition Frequency, or Laser Code), the GPI will start to flash. If the reflected energy is strong enough, the flashing GPI
(Gimbal Pointing Indicator) will automatically become a solid, white square that indicates a valid lock.
23
TMS Switch
22
MAV sensor is SOI (Sensor of Interest) Laser Code (PRF) Maverick Valid Lock
Indication (White Square) 24
Maverick Station
Number Launch Constraint Circle
Gimbal Pointing
Indicator (GPI)
Maverick Dynamic 20-deg Hash Mark

Launch Zone (DLZ) 355
Expansion Only
F: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C II
• Notes on SCAN Mode

• If a valid PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency, or Laser Code) return is not detected (non-flashing GPI), you may enter “Slew” mode. This is done by moving
and releasing the slew switch. Upon doing so, the GPI (Gimbal Pointing Indicator) will automatically scan left and right from center +/- 22 degrees. Using
the slew switch, the user can also set the depression able that the scan will take place from.
• When in Slew mode, the GPI will flash if the correct PRF code is detected. If the energy is strong enough, the GPI “X” will turn into a square and the
seeker will automatically lock onto the return.
• Notes on SLAVE Mode

• In addition to manually aligning the seeker field of view with the target, you may also Slave the seeker to a SPI or TGP location within 30 degrees of the
seeker’s boresight. This is done with the “slave to SPI” or “slave to TGP” HOTAS command (China Hat FWD LONG). When commanded, the seeker will
perform an auto-track scan of the designated area and attempt to find the coded PRF. If detected (flashing GPI “X”), the user will need to manually
designate with a TMS forward short HOTAS command.
Laser Code (PRF)

System) Switch
Gimbal Pointing
Indicator (GPI)
China Hat Switch

356
Expansion Only
F: PERFORM ATTACK
27
A-10C II
25. Verify that Laser is firing (blinking “L” on the HUD). If not, press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert”
binding) to fire laser and TMS FWD SHORT to attempt to re-acquire the laser with the Maverick.
26. Verify once more that the laser maverick is locked and tracking the laser (white square on MAV page), and
that the GPI (Gimbal Pointing Indicator) is within the Launch Constraint Circle.
27. When missile has a good lock and is within range (generally between 3 and 7 nm, use the Dynamic Launch 25 / 29
Zone indicator accordingly), press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to fire Maverick missile. Nosewheel Steering Button
28. Missile will launch and track the laser until impact.
29. After missile impact, press the Nosewheel Steering Button again to stop firing the laser.
Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm.
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic Launch Constraint Circle Maverick DLZ (Dynamic
Launch Zone) Range
Maverick Reticle
27
Target Range Caret Maverick Line of

and Numeric (nm) Sight Range (nm)

minimum range.
Laser is Firing
“L” Blinking
Missile Time of Flight (sec)
Maverick Station Number
Gimbal Pointing Indicator (GPI)

26 Maverick Valid Lock Indication SPI Sensor Indicator 357
(White Square) TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
Expansion Only
A-10C II
358
2.12 – GBU-54 LASER JDAM A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
A-10C II
Note: A hybrid of a GBU-38 JDAM and a GBU-12 laser-guided bomb is the GBU-54/A LJDAM. This
weapon can act in both INS/GPS and laser-guidance modes, this allowing it launch-and-leave and
engaging through cloud/dust as an INS/GPS weapon, and with the precision and ability to engage
moving targets that laser-guidance provides. The GBU-54’s laser tracking mode will automatically take
precedence over the coordinates/TGP method. This is useful when designating a moving target with a
targeting pod laser or using laser designators from friendly wingmen or a JTAC.
359
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER TARGETING POD DESIGNATION (LASER) 1e
A: PROGRAM GBU-54 LASER CODE (VIA DSMS PAGE)

A-10C II
1. Program the laser code the GBU-54 laser JDAM will track. You can do this with the DSMS page.
a) Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page 1e
c) Select desired GBU-54 station (Station 7)
e) Enter desired GBU-54 laser code on the UFC scratchpad (i.e. 1687).
f) Click on the OSB next to CODE to set new laser code (1687) on the GBU-54.
g) Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station only. If you
have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g., 5 and 7), select LOAD SYM to load
these parameters on both Laser JDAM stations.
1b 1d
1c
1f
1g
1a 360
Expansion Only
2
A-10C II

7 6
361
3
Expansion Only
12b
A-10C II
8. OPTIONAL: If you want to use the auto-lasing function (laser is automatically fired after GBU-54 is
launched), toggle the OSB next to AUTO LS. We will leave it OFF.
9. OPTIONAL: If auto-lasing function is set to ON, enter desired “laser on” time (sec) on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to LS TIME. Otherwise, leave to 0.
10. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a specific JDAM impact azimuth, enter desired azimuth (deg) on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to IMP AZ. We will leave it to 0. 9a
11. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a specific JDAM impact angle, enter desired impact angle (deg) on the 10a
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to IMP ANG. We will leave it to 0. 11a
12. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display, enter 12a
13. OPTIONAL: TARGET ID function not yet documented.
14. OPTIONAL: SPI WYPT ID function not yet documented. 15
13
8
14 10b
12c
11b
9b
362
Expansion Only
A-10C II
18. The GBU-54 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display. 17
DMS Switch
17b
17a
17d
17c
363
Expansion Only
C: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C II
(ON) as well.
Mode.
21. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the
19
19
20b
21c
TGP is SOI
21a
TGP is not SOI
21b 20a
364
Coolie Hat Switch
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER TARGETING POD DESIGNATION (LASER) 22c
A-10C II

• If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight): In the TGP page, press the OSB
next to B-S (Boresight Function)
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will toggle
tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving target).
B-S (Boresight) Function
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
22d (nm)
DMS Switch
22e
TMS Switch
22e
22c
22a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 22b
Expansion Only
A-10C II
23. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays
your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
24. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of
Interest (SPI).
25. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
STPT is SPI 23
24
TMS Switch

SPI
23 TGP is SOI
25 TGP is SPI 24
Expansion Only
28a
D: PREPARE TARGET LASING
A-10C II

28. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose laser code 1687, which we set
previously on the GBU-54 stations 5 and 7.
30. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once fired by pressing the
Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH ON.
27a
27b
31
26
29
30
367
Expansion Only
F: PERFORM ATTACK AND LASE
A-10C II
32. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and
maneuver the aircraft to align the velocity vector with the ASL.
33. The DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) current range and caret indication will move down from
above the DLZ.
34. Once the current range caret is between the maximum and minimum range indication on
the DLZ, the weapon may be released. MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
35. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until JDAM is released. 34
36. The GBU-54 will home on the target coordinates by itself, guided by its own embedded Weapon Release Button
GPS. Laser is Firing
37. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert” binding) to fire laser. 37 / 39
38. The GBU-54 will then automatically track the laser (instead of the INS/GPS coordinates) Nosewheel Steering Button
until impact. Velocity Vector
39. After JDAM impact, press the Nosewheel Steering Button again to stop firing the laser.
DLZ Maximum Range Indication ASL (Azimuth

Steering Line)

Indication (nm)
Laser is Firing
“L” Blinking

In Range Indication
GBU-54 Selected
Targeting Pod
Diamond (SPI) Master Arm ON
368
Expansion Only
A-10C II
369
2.13 – APKWS (ADVANCED PRECISION KILL WEAPON SYSTEM) A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS (TARGETING POD DESIGNATION) 1e
A: PROGRAM APKWS LASER CODE (VIA DSMS PAGE)

A-10C II
1. Program the laser code the APKWS rocket will track. You can do this with the DSMS page.
a) Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page 1e
c) Select desired M-151L (or M-282L) APKWS rocket station (Station 8)
e) Enter desired APKWS laser code on the UFC scratchpad (i.e. 1687).
f) Click on the OSB next to CODE to set new laser code (1687) on the APKWS rocket.
g) Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station only. If you
have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g. 4 and 8), select LOAD SYM to load
these parameters on both APKWS stations.
APKWS (Advanced Precision Kill Weapon System): also displayed as the AGR-20A, the APKWS combines a standard 2.75-inch high explosive rocket
with a laser guidance kit and control fins. There are two warhead options: the M-151 (High Explosive) and the M-282 (Penetrator Warhead).
1b 1d
1c
1f
1g
370
1a
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS (TARGETING POD DESIGNATION) 6
B: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C II

4. Select M-151L (or M-282L) APKWS Rockets (green when selected)
4
4
Selected Stations
371
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS (TARGETING POD DESIGNATION)
8b
A-10C II

7. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Rocket Launch
• PRS (Pairs): Rockets launched in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the set number of
rockets set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting 8a
• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the number of
rockets specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs

8. If required, set Rocket Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC scratchpad (2), then
pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
9. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify rocket settings.
8c
9
6
372
Expansion Only
12b
A-10C II
10. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in mils) on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment). Value must be between -15 and +15
mils.
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). Value must be between -15 and
+15 mils. 12a
13
10
12c 11
373
Expansion Only
D: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C II
14. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different weapon profiles available.
15. Select M-151L (or M-282L) profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then press on the
OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• While HUD is SOI (Coolie Hat Switch UP), cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS
(Data Management Switch) left or right.
16. The M-151L (or M-282L) Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
15
DMS Switch
M-151L Weapon Profile
Stations Selected
15b
15a
15d
15c
374
Expansion Only
E: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C II
17. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the
LASER ARM switch to ARM (ON) as well.
18. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select
the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode.
17
17
18b
19c
TGP is SOI
19a
TGP is not SOI
19b 18a
375
Coolie Hat Switch
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS (TARGETING POD DESIGNATION) 20c
A-10C II

• If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight): In the TGP page, press the OSB
next to B-S (Boresight Function)
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will toggle
tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving target). B-S (Boresight) Function
TGP Reticle
Slant Range
20d (nm)
DMS Switch
20e
TMS Switch
20e
20c
20a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 20b
Expansion Only
A-10C II
21. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays
your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
22. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of
Interest (SPI).
STPT is SPI 21
22
TMS Switch
21 Coolie Hat Switch SPI
21 TGP is SOI
TGP is SPI 22
377
Expansion Only
25a
F: LASE TARGET
A-10C II

25. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose laser code 1687, which we set
previously on the APKWS stations 4 and 8.
27. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once fired by pressing the
Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH ON.
24a
24b
28
23
26
27
29
Laser is Firing
378
Expansion Only
G: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C II
31. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, M-151L profile and ARM status are displayed.
30b
31
30a
Master Mode Switch
379
Expansion Only
G: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C II
33. A CCIP Rocket Reticle & Pipper will appear when you are not yet close enough to the target.
34. Verify that Laser is firing (blinking “L” on the HUD). If not, press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert” binding) to fire laser.
35. When the slant range to target is less than 10 nm, place the center of the CCIP Reticle on the target.
36. At a slant range of around 5.5 to 5.0 nm, hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to launch rockets.
37. Rockets will launch and track the laser until impact.
38. After rocket impact, press the Nosewheel Steering Button again to stop firing the laser. 36
38
CCIP Rocket Reticle

Laser is Firing
“L” Blinking
Pipper
Slant Range (nm)
Targeting Pod
Designation Diamond 36
Rocket Time of Flight (sec)
Rocket Selected
380
Expansion Only
A-10C II
381
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR)
WARTHOG A - GUN PROCEDURE
A-10C
2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to

GUNARM (DOWN)
4. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display
as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate
HUD is SOI. 5
5. press & hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode Switch
to enter Air-to-Air Master Mode 3

6. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT to
cycle through the AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-menu) aircraft
options to match the aircraft you are engaging. In our
case, we will choose a profile set for the Su-25. 4
HUD is SOI
4 1 2
Coolie Hat Switch
AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) Setting &

6
Ammunition Count
6 5 382
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR) Target
Gun Boresight Reticle
AMIL (Air Mass Impact Line)
WARTHOG A - GUN PROCEDURE
7. When you have selected the correct AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) setting and have
A-10C
the target within the funnel with just the wing/rotor tips touching the sides of the
funnel, you can fire the gun.
8. You can also use the AMIL (Air Mass Impact Line) to assist in gun aiming. This is a
vertical line which represents the lead angle due to trajectory shift and gravity Gun Funnel
drop of rounds from close range out to approximately 2 seconds time of flight.
The top of the AMIL shows where the bullets will be just after the firing burst and
the distance they will fall towards the earth after 2 seconds due to deceleration
and gravity drop.

9
383
Gun Trigger
WARTHOG B - SETTING GUN FUNNEL WINGSPAN
To set up custom wingspan values for the gun funnel:
A-10C
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by ENT Button
DATA Rocker Key
Left Clicking on the switch.
2. Select AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) option with the SEL Rocker Key. SEL Rocker Key
3. Press ENT to enter AAS menu.
4. The AAS menu determines what preset wingspan profiles are programmed and
which ones are available via the DMS (Data Management Switch).
5. Select the profiles you want to have access to by moving the cursor with the SEL
rocker key, then press ENT to make them available or not (o = available).
6. MAN-FXD is a programmable profile for Fixed Wing aircraft, while MAN-RTY is a
programmable profile for Rotary aircraft like helicopters. 4
7. We want to program a custom profile for a MiG-21. Select MAN-FXD menu with the
SEL rocker key, then press ENT.
O: Profile Available
6
1 7
384
8. In the MAN FXD menu, we need to set the target’s wingspan
A-10C
(in feet), length (in feet) and approximate airspeed (in knots).
9. FXD WNGSPN field is already selected. ENT Button
DATA Rocker Key
10. Set FXD WNGSPN to the MiG-21’s wingspan of 23 ft with the
DATA rocker switch. SEL Rocker Key
11. Select FXD LENGTH field with the SEL rocker switch.
12. Set FXD LENGTH to the MiG-21’s length of 49 ft. 8 10
9
13. Select FXD TGTSPEED field with the SEL rocker switch. 11 12
14. Set FXED TGTSPEED to an approximate speed of 200 kts.

15. Select STORE option with the SEL rocker switch, then press
ENT.
16. Select EXIT AAS menu with the SEL rocker switch, then press
ENT.
17. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Right Clicking on the
switch. HUD will revert to its normal mode.
17a
13
15
14
17b
16
385
18. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of
A-10C
Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.

19. press & hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode Switch to enter Air-to-Air
Master Mode
20. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT to cycle through the AAS Gun Funnel
(Air-to-Air Sub-menu) aircraft options to match the aircraft you are engaging.
In our case, we will choose the custom profile set for the MiG-21, which is
MAN-FXD. 19
18
HUD is SOI
18
Coolie Hat Switch
AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) Setting &

20
Ammunition Count
20 19 386
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch
3.2 – AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
WARTHOG 7
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) Sidewinder Reticle
3. Select AIM-9 Air-to-Air Missile (green when selected).
A-10C
4. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate
HUD is SOI. 6
5. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT to select desired weapon profile.
6. press & hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode Switch to enter Air-to-Air Master Mode
7. Sidewinder missile reticle is caged in boresight mode by default. This mode is quite limiting but is useable if
you steer the aircraft to set the reticle on a target. 4
8. Press TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to uncage Sidewinder. Reticle will start moving HUD is SOI
and actively look for heat signatures to track.

• Note: if you want to cage the missile, press the TMS Switch AFT SHORT.
9. While missile is searching, you will hear a low-pitch growl. 5
10. You can slew the Sidewinder reticle using the Slew Control Switch. Weapon Profile
4
Coolie Hat Switch
8
TMS Switch
10
2 3 Slew Control Switch
5 6
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch 387
WARTHOG
11. When Sidewinder tracks a heat signature, the reticle will lock on the
target and a high-pitch growl will be heard.
12. Press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to fire Maverick
A-10C
missile.
12
11
Sidewinder reticle locked on target
(high pitch growl)
388
WARTHOG
Note:
• You can also use the targeting pod in AA (Air-to-Air) mode to spot a target. When A-A is first entered, the TGP will enter A-A boresight mode. From the boresight mode, you may slew the
A-10C
TGP crosshair using the slew switch. When slewing, the TGP camera moves in a space stabilized manner.
• If the valid air target passes within the narrow field of view area (represented by the four corner markers), the TGP will attempt to track the target and place a cross “+” on it. If the target
flies outside the narrow field of view area, the cross will disappear.
• If you then command TMS Forward Short HOTAS command (command point track), the target will be centered in the crosshair and a box will be drawn around the target to conform to its
size. When in this mode, “POINT” will be displayed as well as the tracking cross. To exit POINT track, the user may command INR track (with TMS Forward Short) and return to RATES
mode.
389
4 – ORDNANCE JETTISON
WARTHOG 4.1 - SELECTIVE JETTISON
A-10C
2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page 1

3. Press OSB next to SJET (Selective Jettison)
4. Select desired station with the OSB (Option Select Button) next to it. DSMS store will flash when selected.
5. Select Jettison Mode
• RACK: jettisons weapon launcher rack as well as weapon store
• STR: jettisons weapon store but not the rack
• MSL: fires Maverick missile without arming or guiding it
6. Select Fuze Option Mode (only applicable if STR (Store) mode is selected)
• SAFE: store disarmed
• NOSE ARM: nose fuze is armed
• TAIL ARM: tail fuze is armed
• ARMED: N/T (Nose/Tail) fuze is armed 6 5
7. Press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to drop ordnance
4
3
7 2
Weapon Release Button 390
WARTHOG 4.1 - SELECTIVE JETTISON
A-10C
MK-82AIR Store
Fuze Safe / Rack Mode Selected
Weapon Rack 391

WARTHOG 4.2 - EMERGENCY STORES JETTISON
Pressing the “EXT STORES JETT” button will jettison all stores (excluding the Targeting Pod and ECM pod) on stations 1 through 11.
A-10C
Once pressed, and regardless of landing gear handle position, all stores will be released in station priority order.
External Stores Jettison Button

Jettisons all external stores except
Targeting Pod and ECM pods
392
A-10C
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES WARTHOG
COUNTERMEASURES
393
COUNTERMEASURES – INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
Countermeasures are very simple to use. You have three countermeasure types
at your disposal: flares, chaff and an ECM (Electronic Countermeasure) jammer.
A-10C
We will explore together what is used against what, and how.
Missiles can generally track you using 2 things: radar signature (radar waves are
sent on you and you reflect them, which is called a “radar signature”) and heat
signature (like the exhaust of your engines). Countermeasures will only be
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES
effective against the kind of weapon it was meant to counter; a heat-seeking

missile will not care if you deploy electronic countermeasures against it since it
tracks heat, not radar signatures. This is why it is important to know what is
attacking you in order to counter it properly. This is what the RWR (Radar
Warning Receiver) is for: to help you know what is firing at you so you can take
the adequate action to counter it.
Flares
Flares are used against missiles that track heat (infrared or IR) signatures.
Instead of going for the heat signature generated by your engines, a missile will
go for a hotter heat source like flares.
Chaff is a form of “passive” jamming. Passive (reflected) jamming is when a Chaff

deceptive object or device reflects radar waves. Chaff is simply a bundle of small
pieces of metal foil with reflective coating, which creates clusters of radar
signatures that prevent a radar to get a solid lock on the aircraft itself.
The AN/ALQ-131 ECM jammer pod is a form of “continuous” jamming, also

called “active” or “transmitted” jamming. This device transmits its own
synchronized radar waves back at your enemy’s radar receiver to simulate
erroneous radar wave returns. Simply put, active jamming will try to drown a
radar in white noise.
In order to use these three forms of countermeasures, you can use

“countermeasure programs”, routines that will deploy a number of flares/chaff
for a number of cycles at a given interval. A detailed list of these programs is
shown next page.
394
COUNTERMEASURES – CONTROLS
WARTHOG
A-10C
CMSP (Countermeasure Signal Processor) Panel


• DOWN: ECM ON/OFF
• FORWARD: Initiate countermeasure program
(deploys flares/chaff routine)
• AFT: Terminate countermeasure program (cancels
flares/chaff routine)
• RIGHT: Next countermeasure program
• LEFT: Previous countermeasure program
395
COUNTERMEASURES – DISPENSERS
WARTHOG 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
The A-10 has four sets of chaff and flare dispensers. Two sets are on the wingtips (Mounted under undercarriage)
and these are generally loaded with chaff cartridges. The other two sets are
A-10C
housed in the rear of the main landing gear wheel bays, and these are generally
loaded with flares.
4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
(Mounted under wingtips)
4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
396
CMSP (COUNTERMEASURE SIGNAL PROCESSOR) PANEL
WARTHOG
The CMSP (Countermeasure Signal Processor) panel is located on the forward right console and is your primary means of selecting and programming the CMS
(Countermeasures Set) system.
A-10C
NXT (Countermeasure Program Cycle) Rocker Switch

Return / Save Program Button
Countermeasure Program Selected

CMSP Brightness Control Knob
Chaff/Flare/Other Countermeasure System
Status Counters
JTSN (Countermeasure Jettison) Switch
CMS (Countermeasures Set) Mode Selector

• OFF
SET Option Select Buttons (OSBs) • STBY: Power is applied to the CMSP and CMSC and they
Selects items on the Alphanumeric Display window are fully functional and can be adjusted, but dispensing
chaff and flares is not possible and the ECM and MWS will
not take any active measures.
MWS (Missile Warning System) Power Switch • MAN: Manual Mode means that you must manually run
• FWD: MENU (No Function) the selected chaff/flare or ECM program with the
• MIDDLE: ON Countermeasure Switch on the HOTAS
CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch
• AFT: OFF • SEMI: Semi-Automatic mode will automatically select the
• FWD (Momentary): MENU
best chaff/flare program according to the detected radar.
• MIDDLE: ON
However, it is up to you to start and stop the
JMR (Jammer) Power Switch • AFT: OFF
countermeasure release program
• FWD: MENU (No Function)
• AUTO: system will automatically select the best
• MIDDLE: ON RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) Power Switch chaff/flare and ECM program and initiate and stop the
• AFT: OFF • FWD: MENU (No Function) program
• MIDDLE: ON
• AFT: OFF
397
CMSP (COUNTERMEASURE SIGNAL PROCESSOR) PANEL
WARTHOG
The DISP (Dispenser) Switch has two main functionalities listed below. CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch ON
FWD (Momentary): MENU
A-10C
When placed momentarily in the Up Menu position, you may program how the CMS releases chaff and flares
for the selected program (A-Z). Along the bottom of the display are fields for CHAF, FLAR, INTV and CYCL.
• CHAF. The Chaff field allows you to determine the number of chaff bundles that will be released in the
current program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the CHAF label and the numeric will flash
indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount.
• FLAR. The Flare field allows you to determine the number of flares that will be released in the current
program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the FLAR label and the numeric will flash
indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount.
• INTV. The Interval field allows you to set the time between countermeasure releases in the current program.
This can be set the same way as chaff and flares but in increments of .25 seconds from .25 to 5.
• CYCL. The Cycle field allows you to set the number of times the program will repeat itself.
NXT (Countermeasure Program Cycle) Rocker Switch
CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch ON

MIDDLE: ON
When the DISP switch is in the ON position (after a 5 second RDY indication),
the alphanumeric display will change to allow you to view remaining chaff
and flare stores. When ON, CHAF, FLAR, OTR1 and PROG are displayed left to
right across the bottom on the display window. Above each of these on the
top line is a numeric that indicates how many of the expendables remain on
the aircraft or the selected dispenser program. The numeric will flash when it
SET Option Select Buttons (OSBs)
Selects items on the Alphanumeric Display window
is being dispensed.
398
CMSC (COUNTERMEASURE SET CONTROL) PANEL
WARTHOG
The CMSC (Countermeasure Set Control) panel allows you to control some aspects of the azimuth indicator display, view chaff and flare status, and change electronic
countermeasure (EC) and MWS (Missile Warning System) functions.
A-10C
Selected Countermeasure Program

Jammer Status Countermeasure Mode

Chaff Counter X: Standby
OFF Jammer Mode M: Manual
SBY: Standby AIR / SAM1 / SAM2 / AAA S: Semi-Automatic
OPER: Operating
A: Automatic
Jammer Mode Selector Button

Flare Counter
No Function
RWR PRI (Priority Mode) ON Light
No Function
RWR SEP (Separate) Selector

CMSC Panel Expands groupings of symbols on the RWR display such
Brightness Knob that they can be more easily read
RWR PRI (Priority Mode) Selector

RWR Audio Control Knob Displays 5 highest priority contacts only
Missile Launch (ML) Light

RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
399
COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAMS
WARTHOG
Your Countermeasure switch (CMS) has 5 functions.
• PRESSED DOWN: ECM (Electronic Countermeasure/Jammer) ON/OFF
A-10C
• FORWARD: Initiate countermeasure program (deploys flares/chaff routine)

• AFT: Terminate countermeasure program (cancels flares/chaff routine)
You can program your own “countermeasure program” if you wish, it is

explained in the main DCS A-10C manual.
The four main programs you should be using are: CMS (Countermeasure Switch)
CMS (Countermeasures Set) Mode Selector
• Program A: Old generation radar SAM site
• Program B: New generation radar SAM site
• Program C: IR heat-seeking SAM site
• Program D: Unknown/Miscellaneous
You can choose between a MANUAL mode (recommended) or the AUTO

mode, which automatically chooses the best countermeasure program for
you. I generally select program D since it counters pretty much anything. It
might consume a significant number of flares/chaff, but it is better to be out
of countermeasures than to be out of A-10.
400
ELECTRONIC COUNTERMEASURE (ECM) JAMMER Jammer Status
Countermeasure Mode
X: Standby
OFF
WARTHOG
Jammer Mode M: Manual
You have four main ECM jammer modes: SBY: Standby
AIR / SAM1 / SAM2 / AAA S: Semi-Automatic
OPER: Operating
A: Automatic
A-10C
• AIR: counters most air-to-air radars

• SAM1: counters older-generation SAM systems like the SA-3, SA-6 and SA-8
• SAM2: counters newer-generation SAM systems like 2S6, SA-16, SA-11, SA-10 and SA-15
• AAA: counters radar-directed gun systems like the ZSU-23-4 and the ZU-23.
You can switch between jammer modes using the jammer mode selector button next to the
RWR. The jammer mode indicator tells you the mode you are using and the status of the
jammer. For instance, “OPR SAM1” means that you are using (operating) your ECM program
SAM1. “SBY” means that your ECM is not actively jamming enemy radar. Keep that in mind. Selected Countermeasure Program
Jammer Mode Selector Button

• DOWN: ECM ON/OFF
AN/ALQ-131 ECM (Electronic
Countermeasure) Pod
401
RWR (RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
WARTHOG
Your RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) will tell you what are the radar emitting signatures around you with a top-down view, both friendly and enemy contacts. The
closer the symbol to the center of the circle, the stronger the radar signal strength.
A-10C
A symbol without a circle around it means that the radar is in search mode (in other words: not tracking you yet).
A symbol with a steady circle around it indicates that the radar is tracking/locked on to your aircraft. A missile is not heading your way yet, but it can be any second
now if the symbol is an enemy SAM site.
A symbol with a flashing circle around it indicates that the radar is supporting a missile that has been launched at you. You are about to receive a missile right up the
arse. This is where you pop chaff, flares, ECM and start your evasive manoeuvers.
RWR PRI (Priority Mode) ON Light
RWR SEP (Separate) Selector

Expands groupings of symbols on the RWR display such
that they can be more easily read
RWR PRI (Priority Mode) Selector

RWR Audio Control Knob Displays 5 highest priority contacts only
RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
402
RWR SYMBOL LIST
List made by .408-X~RAY
WARTHOG
A-10C
Note: “U” symbol stands for “Unknown”, which is sometimes attributed to ships.
403
MWS (MISSILE WARNING SYSTEM)
WARTHOG
The MWS (Missile Warning System) will indicate whether a missile is heading straight to your face or not. If the MWS warning light (red) is lit, immediately start evasive
manoeuvers and deploy countermeasures ASAP. You can have three different messages:
A-10C
• ACTIVE: MWS system is active

• LAUNCH: A missile is launched and heading towards you
• OFF: Your MWS system is off
The Radar Warning Receiver will display the direction of the missile launch with a “M” with a circle.
Radar Warning Receiver Missile Launch Indication

M: Missile Detected
No Function
Missile Warning System Message

When a missile launch has been detected by the Missile Launch Warning Light
MWS system, this window will indicate LAUNCH.
When the MWS has power, it will display
ACTIVE and with no power it will display OFF. 404
THE ART OF DEFEATING A MISSILE
WARTHOG
Evading missiles is an art: this is what we call “defeating a missile”. There are many videos that explain it well (much better than I could in
one page or 2), so here is a list of useful resources you can consult.
A-10C
DCS A-10 MISSILE AVOIDANCE, by A Kaiser

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ak6EgzDwiGs
AIR POWER AUSTRALIA – EVADING THE GUIDED MISSILE, by Carlo Kopp

http://www.ausairpower.net/TE-Evading-Missiles.html
A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO MISSILE EVASION – TRAINING IN FALCON 4.0, by Mark “Boxer” Doran
http://www.simhq.com/_air/air_016a.html
FIGHTER COMBAT – TACTICS AND MANOEUVERING, by Robert L. Shaw

http://www.amazon.ca/Fighter-Combat-Maneuvering-Robert-Shaw/dp/0870210599
SA6 SAM Site
405
DATALINK INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
One of the biggest challenges of integrated modern warfare is the identification of contacts. As various information donors like friendly fighters, ground radar stations, AWACS
(Airborne Warning and Control System, like an E-3 Sentry or an E-2 Hawkeye), and ships interrogate unknown contacts with IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) systems, this
A-10C
information needs to be relayed to everyone within a given Network. This is where Datalink comes in; the Situation Awareness Data Link (SADL) integrates US Air Force close
air support aircraft with the digitized battlefield via the US Army's Enhanced Position Location Reporting System (EPLRS). More than just a radio or a data modem, SADL
provides fighter-to-fighter, air-to-ground and ground-to-air data communications that are robust, secure, jam-resistant and contention-free. With its inherent position and
status reporting for situation awareness, SADL provides an effective solution to the long-standing air-to-ground combat identification problem.
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL
Datalink information shared

within a same network
406
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) PAGE
The A-10C is equipped with the Situational Awareness Datalink (SADL) such that it can communicate with friendly
A-10C
forces and be more aware of hostile forces in the operating area. When enabled with the JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio
System) switch on the AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel) and the OWN and GROUP network (NET) identification
is set up properly, the following symbols can be displayed on the TAD.
JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) Power Switch
Attack Tasking Message Received
Upon receiving a JTAC target assignment, the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
ATTACK message will appear and flash at the
Broadcast ON/OFF Indication
top of the screen until you respond with a
CNTCO or WILCO response.
CNTCO (Cannot Comply) Response to Tasking
If you cannot comply (CNTCO) with the target
assignment, pressing OSB (Option Select Button) next
Wilco (Will Comply) Response to Tasking to CNTCO will clear the Assigned Target symbol and
If you decide to accept the Target Assignment, ATTACK message from the TAD.
press OSB 19 and the Assigned Target symbol
will stop flashing and become solid and the Assigned Target
ATTACK message will be removed. When you receive a target assignment, this red triangle
symbol with a dot in the center will appear at the location of
the assigned target on the TAD. As with other symbols, you
may hook it for detailed data about the target. The
Mini-SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) appearance of this symbol will coincide with the ATTACK
When a SADL equipped unit is broadcasting its message at the top of the screen. Once received, you can
SPI across the SADL network, it will appear to either reply with a CNTCO or WILCO response. The symbol with
other SADL equipped units as a Mini-SPI flash until you respond.
symbol.
NET Page Selector
SADL Network Configuration page that will allow
you to set your OWN and GROUP numbers.
407
WARTHOG NETWORK CONFIGURATION
A SADL network is divided in groups, which are basically different flights. There are two sets of two-digit numbers associated with the SADL datalink: Group and Ownship.
A-10C
The first number is the Group ID (Identification); it is for you and the other members of your flight. You will all use the same GRP ID number.
The second number is your Ownship ID. This will be unique to your group and jet - so you might be Group 01, Own 01, and someone else can be Group 02, Own 01.
FLIGHT 1 – WINGMAN FLIGHT 2 - LEAD

GRP ID: 03 FLIGHT 2 - WINGMAN FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)
GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 04 GRP ID: 01 GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 02
OWN ID: 04 OWN ID: 01
FLIGHT 1 – WINGMAN
GRP ID: 01
SADL NETWORK OWN ID: 02
FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)

GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 01
FLIGHT 2 - LEAD
GRP ID: 02
OWN ID: 01
FLIGHT 2 - WINGMAN
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) GRP ID: 02
Can be broadcast to all members of the SADL Network OWN ID: 02
408
WARTHOG NETWORK CONFIGURATION
In order to use SADL, you need to join a network with a group identification number
A-10C
(GRP ID) and your own identification number (OWN ID). To set your group and own ID:
1. On TAD page, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to NET.
TAD Selector
2. Your current GRP ID and OWN ID are displayed on the right.
3a Exits NET page and returns to main TAD page
3. To select your GROUP ID number, enter the ID number on the UFC (Up-Front 4a
Control) scratchpad (i.e. 01) and press on the OSB next to GRP ID.
4. To change your own identification number, enter the ID number on the UFC (Up-
Front Control) scratchpad (i.e. 01) and press on the OSB next to OWN ID. If the
OWN ID number is already use by someone else, you will get an error message.
5. If desired, you can set your callsign by typing it on the CDU keypad (i.e. FAC1 for
Forward Air Controller 1), then pressing on the OSB next to CALL.
Own ID Number
3b
4b
4c
5
3 Group ID Number
1b
NET Page Selector

1a SADL Network Configuration page that will allow NET (Network Configuration) Page
409
you to set your OWN and GROUP numbers.
WARTHOG SYMBOLOGY
TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) Cursor
Used to hook SADL symbols and SPIs
A-10C
Flight Members
Aircraft on the SADL network and on the same GROUP ID number
as you.
• Center number: OWN ID of the aircraft within the flight
Friendly SADL Networked Members

Aircraft on the SADL network but on a separate GROUP ID number.
Friendly Ground Forces

Friendly ground forces; unit must be assigned an Enhanced Position

Location Reporting System (EPLRS) radio to broadcast their location
Mini-SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

When a SADL equipped unit is broadcasting its SPI across the SADL
network, it will appear to other SADL equipped units as a Mini-SPI
symbol. This symbol looks like the standard SPI symbol but with one
less tier. Connecting this symbol to the broadcast aircraft is a blue
line.
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Broadcast

When broadcasting your SPI to friendly forces, this field will be lit in
reverse video. When broadcasting your SPI, other SADL equipped units
will see your SPI on their displays as a Mini-SPI and a blue line connecting
your aircraft icon to your Mini-SPI. If you are flying in a multiplayer
mission and wish to send your SPI to other friendly aircraft, you must set
SPI to ON using the DMS Left Long HOTAS command. 410
WARTHOG FUNCTIONS
SADL has a number of useful functions we will explore in the following pages:
A-10C
• A: Capability to hook other wingmen or SADL symbols and get

information from them (type, coordinates, altitude, etc.)
• B: Capability to send messages to members of the SADL network
• C: Capability to receive messages from members of the SADL network
• D: Capability to broadcast a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) across the

whole SADL network or to specific members of the network. This is
useful to exchange target locations between members of a same flight.
• E: Capability to use a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) broadcasted from a

SADL network member
• F: Capability to task targets to other SADL members
• G: Capability to receive taskings from members of the SADL network

(e.g. a JTAC, Joint Tactical Air Controller)
411
A - HOOKING DATALINK SYMBOLS
WARTHOG
If you want to have a bearing, distance and elevation information on a specific TAD symbol (i.e. a Bullseye/Anchor
Point or Waypoint), you can “hook” a symbol using the TAD when it is the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C
1. Set the TAD as the SOI: press and hold the Coolie Hat Switch in the direction of the MFCD screen displaying the TAD
2. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TAD Cursor over the desired symbol you want to hook. TAD symbols can
include the SPI, TGP diamond, waypoint/steerpoint, or bullseye.
3. Once TAD cursor is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the symbol. Hook Mode (OWN/BULL/CURS/HOOK)
4. Hooked Symbol Data will be displayed on the lower right of the TAD. Upper Row: Symbol from where the hook line begins
5. Select desired Hook Mode with the OSB. Lower Row: Symbol where the hook line ends
6. To Un-Hook a symbol, press the TMS (Target Management System) AFT SHORT.
7. To reset TAD cursor position, press China Hat Switch AFT SHORT. Shown: hook line goes from bullseye (BULL) to TAD Cursor (CURS).
• HOOK is the hooked symbol

• CURS is the TAD cursor
• OWN is your ownship
• BULL is the bullseye
1b
TAD is SOI (Sensor
of Interest)
Ownship Symbol
Hook Mode Selector 5
TAD Cursor 2 3 6

Hook Line System) Switch
Waypoint 5 Symbol
China Hat Switch 7

2
Hooked Symbol
Coordinates Hooked Symbol (Waypoint 5) Data Slew Control Switch
151: Bearing To Symbol (deg) 1a
038: Distance To Symbol (nm) 4 412
4480: Symbol Elevation (ft) Coolie Hat Switch
A - HOOKING DATALINK SYMBOLS
WARTHOG
Here is an example that shows a wingman being hooked.
• Note: If TAD is SOI and you have a hooked target… press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to set the TAD hooked target as the Sensor Point of
A-10C
Interest (SPI). The HUD will then track this hooked contact.
Upper Number: Hooked Aircraft Bearing Relative to your direction
Square: Hooked Aircraft location
Lower Number: Distance to Hooked Aircraft (nm)
TAD Cursor (On Hooked Aircraft)
Hook Line
Hook Mode Selector
Hooked Symbol Ground Speed (kts)
Hooked Symbol Type
Hooked Symbol Hooked Symbol (Waypoint 5) Data

Coordinates 239: Bearing To Symbol (deg) TMS (Target Management
003: Distance To Symbol (nm) TAD Hooked System) Switch
6560: Aircraft Altitude (ft) Aircraft is the SPI 413
TN 0202: Identification Number (OWN ID 02 – GRP ID 02)
B - HOW TO SEND MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. Select TAD page
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the
A-10C
Coolie Hat Switch pressed LONG in the direction of the TAD page
3. Slew TAD Cursor on Wingman. Its “TN” number will appear, which is its OWN 6
ID followed by its GRP ID in the SADL network.
4. Select MSG Page
5. Select NEW
6. On UFC (Up Front Control) Scratchpad, type TN Number of Wingman (0201)
7. Press the OSB next to “TO”. This will set who you send the message to.
5
2b
3b 7
1 4
3a
Symbol Data 2a Slew Control Switch
3c
TN 0201: Identification Number (OWN ID 02 – GRP ID 01) 414
Coolie Hat Switch
B - HOW TO SEND MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
8. Type desired message content on CDU (Control Display Unit) Keyboard
9. Select MOD TEXT to enter text
A-10C
10. With the SET LINE OSBs, set arrow next to text line you want to send
11. Click SEND MSG
9b
9a
9
7 11
415
C - HOW TO RECEIVE MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. NEW MSG means that a new message has been received.
2. Select MSG Page
A-10C
3. Select RCVD.
4. Message will be displayed.
5. To acknowledge the message, click on ACK.
6. To delete the message, click DEL.
1
3
6a
FROM
TN 2001: Identification Number (OWN ID 20 – GRP ID 01) 6b
5b
5a
416
D - HOW TO BROADCAST A SPI WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. First, create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) with any sensor. As an example, we will choose the
targeting pod.
A-10C
a) Power TGP (Targeting Pod), then select TGP page in A-G mode.
b) Make TGP SOI with the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays
your TGP feed
c) Slew TGP with the Slew Switch
d) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target 1d 1e
TMS Switch
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor
1c
Slew Switch
1b
Coolie Hat Switch
1b TGP is SOI
1c
1e SPI
1d
1e
417
TGP is SPI
D - HOW TO BROADCAST A SPI WITH SADL
WARTHOG
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
A-10C
3. You can broadcast either on the whole SADL Network or to a specific aircraft
4. To send SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) to a specific aircraft:
a) Slew TAD Cursor on aircraft you want to send the SPI to
b) Click SEND button
5. To broadcast on whole NET:
a) Use HOTAS to broadcast SPI
• A-10C LEGACY: Press DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT LONG.
• A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: Press TMS (Target Management System) LEFT LONG 4a 5a
b) SPI ON indication will appear when SPI data is being broadcast. Slew Switch DMS Switch
c) Every member of the SADL network will then receive your SPI in its own TAD. 2
6. The SADL members you sent the SPI to will see the SPI you just sent as a Mini-SPI symbol. Coolie Hat Switch 5a
TMS Switch
Your Targeting Pod SPI
(Sensor Point of Interest) 6
Mini-SPI
4b
5b
4a TAD Cursor on 5b
Wingman Symbol
View from your wingman’s TAD
2 TAD is SOI
418
E - HOW TO USE A SPI RECEIVED VIA SADL Mini-SPI (from Wingman)
WARTHOG
1. A SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) received via SADL from a wingman will be
visible as a “Mini-SPI” symbol (a two-tier wedding cake).
A-10C
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the
Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
3. Slew TAD cursor on Mini-SPI symbol
4. Press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the Mini-SPI Your SPI
5. Press TMS (Target Management System) FWD LONG to create your own SPI
(Sensor Point of Interest) from the Mini-SPI sent by your wingman.
6. Press China Hat FWD LONG to slave all sensors (Targeting Pod, Maverick
Missile, etc.) to your own new SPI. 6 China Hat Switch
2 Coolie Hat Switch
4 5 TMS (Target Management System) Switch 3 Slew Control Switch

1 Mini-SPI (designated by Wingman)
Line from Broadcasting

Wingman to Mini-SPI
Your SPI (created from
5
wingman’s Mini-SPI)
Mini-SPI
3 TAD Cursor (Hooked) 4
Wingman
2
You
419
F - TASKING TARGETS TO OTHER SADL AIRCRAFT
WARTHOG
In addition to receiving Target Assignments from JTAC and other SADL-equipped aircraft, you can also assign targets to
other SADL-equipped aircraft. This is done through a combination of using the SPI and active hooking.
A-10C
To create a Target Assignment:
1. First, create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) with any sensor. As an example, we will choose the targeting pod.
a) Power TGP (Targeting Pod), then select TGP page in A-G mode.
b) Make TGP SOI with the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed 1d 1e
c) Slew TGP with the Slew Switch TMS Switch
d) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of 1c
Interest (SPI). Slew Switch
1b
Coolie Hat Switch
1a
SPI 1e
1b TGP is SOI
1d
SPI
1a
TGP is SPI 1e 420

WARTHOG
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat
Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
3. Slew TAD Cursor on aircraft you want to send the Target Assignment to
A-10C
4. Once TAD cursor is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD
SHORT to hook the aircraft.
5. Network Identification (OWN ID – GRP ID) of the hooked aircraft recipient will appear
below the SEND label.
6. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to SEND to send the Target Assignment. 4
TMS Switch
2 3
Coolie Hat Switch Slew Switch
Your Targeting Pod SPI

(Sensor Point of Interest)
6
3a TAD Cursor
3b TAD Cursor on
Wingman Symbol
Wingman Symbol
2 TAD is SOI
421
WARTHOG
7. Your hooked wingman will then receive a new tasking assignment, a NEW TASKING message will
appear on both of his MFCDs regardless of the current page.
8. On your hooked wingman’s TAD, a red triangle will be on the TAD at the location of the target.
A-10C
Target 8
Your TAD
Target seen Target seen by

by Wingman You (SPI)
FLIGHT 1 - WINGMAN
GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 02
TASKING SENT
Your Wingman’s TAD
FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)

GRP ID: 01 422
OWN ID: 01
G - RECEIVING JTAC (JOINT TACTICAL AIR CONTROLLER) TASKING
WARTHOG
During the course of a mission, you may get mission tasking from a Joint Terminal Attack Controller (JTAC) or
another SADL-equipped aircraft that will provide you tasking against a ground target.
1. When you receive a new tasking assignment, a NEW TASKING message will appear on both MFCDs regardless of
A-10C
the current page.

2. To remove the message, press TMS (Target Management System) Switch LEFT SHORT.
3. Select TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) Page and make it SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
4. A red triangle will be on the TAD at the location of the target. A green X will represent friendly units on the
ground.
5. A new tasking from the JTAC will be in the form of a digital 9-line briefing. You can consult it in the MSG page.
6. If you accept the tasking, press OSB (Option Select Button) next to WILCO (Will Comply). If you do not accept the
tasking, press OSB next to CNTCO (Cannot Comply) to decline.
TMS (Target Management 3 Coolie Hat Switch
2
System) Switch
Target 4
6 6
Friendly Unit 4
1
3
TAD is SOI
5 423
3
WARTHOG
7. Because the target (red triangle) is a TAD object, it can be
hooked and be made your SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
8. Slew the TAD cursor on the target symbol (red triangle)
A-10C
using the Slew Control Switch

9. Hook the target symbol by pressing TMS (Target
Management System) Switch FWD SHORT.
10. Once target is hooked, a “CNC” (Cancel) option will be Target TAD Cursor
available
8
11. Bearing and distance (nm) to the SPI are displayed on the
TAD.
12. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD 7
LONG to set the TAD hooked target as the Sensor Point of
Interest (SPI). A SPI symbol will appear.
SPI Symbol 12
10
9
12

System) Switch 8 Slew Control Switch 424
11 Bearing 119 / Distance 4 nm
WARTHOG
13. Once TAD SPI (Tactical Awareness Display Sensor Point of Interest) is designated, press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG
to slave all sensors to this new SPI.
14. HUD (Heads-Up Display), TGP (Targeting Pod) and MAV (Maverick Missile) sensors will all lock on the SPI.
A-10C
15. You can then use weapons as desired.
13 China Hat Switch
TAD SPI Symbol

TAD is SOI
TAD is the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI)
TGP Slaved on SPI
SPI
TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) HUD (Heads-Up Display) TGP (Targeting Pod) 425
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARTHOG You have three main radios on your left console.
• The AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM # 1 radio set is used for air and ground units
• frequencies between 116.00 and 151.975 MHz
A-10C
• The AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM #2 radio set is used for communications with JTAC units
• The AN/ARC-164 UHF radio set is used for wingmen, support flights, air traffic controllers
• The Intercom Panel allows you to choose which radio set
you communicate on. Advanced radio tutorial:
http://en.wiki.eagle.ru/w/images/e/e4/DCS_A-10C_Warthog_Radio_Tutorial.pdf
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL
426
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
ARC-210 V/UHF Radio Panel – Not Yet Available
A-10C II
427
INTERCOM CONTROL PANEL
WARTHOG
The Intercom system panel is a single interface between you and the various navigation and radio systems in regards to their audio input/output. While each of these
navigation and radio systems has their own audio (volume) controls, the Intercom panel overrides their settings. Additionally, the Intercom panel can control the volume
A-10C
level of tones associated with LASTE such as pull up, altitude, etc.
It also allows communication with ground crew (needed for arming and refueling your aircraft).
Audio Control Switches

• INT: Intercom Audio Power (communication with ground crew)
• FM: VHF/FM Receiver Audio Power
• UHF: UHF Receiver Audio Power
• VHF: VHF/AM Receiver Audio Power
• AIM: AIM-9 Sidewinder Seeker Tone Audio Power
• IFF: Interrogation Tone Audio Power
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Localizer/Marker Beacon Tone
Audio Power
• TCN: TACAN Tone Audio Power
HM (Hot Microphone) Switch
Intercom Volume Control INTERCOM Call Button
INTERCOM Selector Switch

Selects which radio your microphone is speaking to
428
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The VHF/AM (Radio 1) transmits and receives between 116.00 and 151.975 MHz. There are also
20 preset channels available.
A-10C
To use the VHF AM Radio:

1. Set Radio Frequency Mode to TR (Transmit-Receive)
2. Adjust Radio Volume as required.
3. Set Radio Function Selector to either MAN (Manual Frequency) or PRE (Preset Channel), as desired. We will
choose a manual frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch FWD .
Microphone Switch
5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM Radio #1 Control Panel

2 VHF Radio Volume Control Knob
VHF AM Radio Function Selector
PRE: Preset Channel 3
LOAD Button VHF Radio Frequency Dials 4

After a frequency has been manually entered, you may
press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will
be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed
in the Preset Indicator Window.
1 OFF
VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector TR: Transmit-Receive
429
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The VHF/FM operates between 30.000 and 76.000 MHz. In most missions,
Radio 2 will be used to communicate with JTAC units. There are also 20
A-10C
preset channels available.
To use the VHF FM Radio:

1. Set Radio Frequency Mode to TR (Transmit-Receive)
3. Set Radio Function Selector to either MAN (Manual Frequency) or PRE (Preset
Channel), as desired. We will choose a manual frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the
Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch AFT .
Microphone Switch
5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
VHF Radio Volume Control Knob 2
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM Radio #2

Control Panel
VHF FM Radio Function Selector
PRE: Preset Channel 3 VHF Radio Frequency Dials 4
LOAD Button
After a frequency has been manually entered, you may
press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will
be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed
1 OFF
in the Preset Indicator Window.
VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
430
AN/ARC-164 UHF TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The UHF radio has 20 preset channels (PRESET) and the ability to manually enter a channel frequency (MNL). The frequency
range runs from 225.000 to 399.975 MHz. During most missions, you will communicate with your flight using this radio.
A-10C
To use the UHF Radio:

1. Set Radio Function Selector to MAIN or BOTH.
3. Set Radio Frequency Mode Selector to either MNL (Manual Frequency) or PRESET (Preset Channel), as desired. We will choose a manual
frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch DOWN .
Microphone Switch
UHF Radio Test Display Button 5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials • DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio
AN/ARC-164 UHF Radio Control Panel UHF Radio Preset Channel Indicator
UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials 4 UHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
UHF Radio Frequency Repeater

UHF Radio Function Selector
OFF
MAIN 1
BOTH
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder UHF Radio Status Button
UHF Radio Tone Switch
2 UHF Radio Volume Control Knob

UHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
MNL: Manual
3
UHF Radio Squelch Switch PRESET
GRD (Guard Frequency)
431
AN/ARC-164 UHF TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
A-10C
LOAD PRESET Cover

Lifting this cover reveals an orange button labeled LOAD. To load a frequency to a preset channel,
you simply:
1. Dial in the frequency manually
2. Select the preset channel you wish to assign the frequency to
3. Press the LOAD button.
432
AN/ARC-210 V/UHF TUTORIAL A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
433
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
434
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
A-10C II
435
WARTHOG
RADIO FREQUENCIES – AIRFIELDS
LOCATION FREQUENCY
Anapa 121.0
A-10C
Batumi 131.0
Beslan 141.0
Gelendzhik 126.0
Gudauta 130.0
Kobuleti 133.0
Kutaisi 134.0
Krasnodar Center 122.0
Krasnodar Pashkovsky 128.0
Krymsk 124.0
Maykop 125.0
Mineral’nye Vody 135.0
Mozdok 137.0
Nalchik 136.0
Novorossiysk 123.0
Senaki 132.0
Sochi 127.0
Soganlug 139.0
Sukhumi 129.0
Tblisi 138.0
436
Vaziani 140.0
FLIGHT CONTROLS Aileron
WARTHOG
Flight control in the A-10C is provided by a series of redundant pushrods and
hydraulic systems that actuate the ailerons (roll), elevators (pitch) and
rudders (yaw). Loss of a single hydraulic system will not disable control but
A-10C
the level of response will decrease depending on the control surface.
The primary elements of the Flight Control Systems (FCS) of the A-10
include the Stability Augmentation System (SAS), the Manual Reversion
Flight Control System (MRFCS), and the Enhanced Attitude Control System Aileron
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS
(EAC). In combination and according to the situation, the FCS determines

how the pilot’s control inputs are transferred to the aircraft.
Pitch control is provided by two elevators at the tail of the plane. In addition
to a direct link pushrod from the cockpit, the two connected elevators are
both powered by hydraulic system actuators. As such, if you lose one of the
hydraulic systems, the other system will handle the load of the other via a
shareable, linking shaft. If one of the two elevators actuators becomes
jammed, that linkage can be disabled and you can fly with the still
operational elevator. Pitch trim is provided by electrically driven trim tabs on
the ends of the elevators.
Roll control is provided by an aileron on each wing. As with the elevators,

the ailerons are powered by both hydraulic systems to provide control Rudder
redundancy. As a failure backup, the trim tabs can also be used to fly the
aircraft in the Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS). Roll trim is
provided by trim tabs on the trailing end of the ailerons.
Yaw control is provided by two rudders, both powered by the two hydraulic
systems. The rudders are controlled in unison by a single cable to the
actuators.
Take note that the A-10’s FCS (Flight Control System) is not a fly-by-wire
system and the pilot is much more in charge of what the aircraft is doing
rather than being a voting member. As such, the A-10 is very much a seat-of- Elevator
your-pants aircraft to fly and can be extremely responsive in the right hands.
Elevator
Rudder 437
SAS (STABILITY AUGMENTATION SYSTEM) SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
WARTHOG
To help dampen and improve flying characteristics in pitch and yaw, the A-10C is equipped with the Stability
Augmentation System (SAS). SAS also provides you automatic turn coordination (adding the proper amount of SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
rudder input when banking the aircraft). The SAS assists in making the A-10C a very stable gun platform.
A-10C

Note: SAS relies upon hydraulic power, and the loss of hydraulics will result in the automatic disengagement of
the SAS channels.
Pitch SAS
The SAS pitch channels allows the Integrated Flight and Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) to provide pitch control
functions up to +5/-2 elevator trailing edge. The most noticeable effect of this is pipper tracking on a target
through the HUD in the pitch axis.
Yaw SAS
The SAS yaw channels have three main functions:

• ± 7-degrees of yaw rate dampening
• ± 7-degrees of rudder authority for turn coordination Takeoff Trim Indicator Light
• ± 10-degrees of rudder authority for yaw trim
The SAS continuously compares the output of the two channels, and if there is an excessive difference, the
system will automatically deactivate both channels of the axis. SAS can also be disconnected with the SAS
disconnect button. Takeoff Trim Control Button
Note: For SAS operation, hydraulic power must be provided.
MRFCS (MANUAL REVERSION FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)

The MRFCS is used for emergency situations when both hydraulics systems have failed or a complete failure is
impending. Flight control is radically reduced and primarily relies on use of trim tabs to fly the aircraft. While
sufficient for light maneuvering, it is not feasible to land with.
Manual Reversion Flight

Control System (MRFCS)
FWD: Flight Controls Normal 438
AFT: Manual Reversion
AIRCRAFT AERODYNAMIC & STRUCTURAL LIMITS
WARTHOG
The A-10C has very gentle flight characteristics
and is overall very easy to fly.
A-10C
Aircraft Limits
Stall Speed 120 kts
Maximum Not To Exceed (VNE) Speed 450 kts

at Sea Level
Cruise Speed 300 kts
Service Ceiling 45000 ft
Rate of Climb 6000 ft/min
Structural G Limit (300-450 kts) at +7.3 G

Sea Level -3.0 G
Combat Range 252 nm
Ferry Range 2240 nm
Negative G Limit: If you fly at negative G for more than

10 seconds, you risk the engines
shutting down due to lack of fuel
supply.
439
HUD DISPLAY MODES Airspeed Tape (kts)
Barometric Altitude Tape (ft)
WARTHOG
You can customize a number of parameters displayed on your
Heads-Up Display. For instance, you can set airspeed tapes,
A-10C
metric/imperial units, a radar altitude tape, airspeed type like

Indicated Airspeed (IAS), True Airspeed (TAS), Ground Speed (GS) or
Indicated Airspeed/Mach (IAS/MACH).
Display Options
TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
(also called Flight Path Marker)

Airspeed (kts)
G: Ground Speed Pitch Ladder (deg)
T: True Airspeed
No letter: Indicated Airspeed
Barometric Altitude (ft)

Vertical Speed Tape (ft/min)
Flight Path Angle (deg)
Radar Altitude (RDRALT) Tape (ft)
The tape ranges from 0 feet at the bottom to
Radar Altitude (ft) 1,500 feet at the top. When above 1,500 feet
AGL, the tape is removed. The small horizontal
line on the tape indicates the set Altitude Alert
Floor setting.
RDRALT tape is only visible if TAPES (Airspeed &

Altitude) tapes are not enabled.
Heading Tape / Scratchpad Data Display
440
HUD DISPLAY MODES
4
WARTHOG 5
HUD Display Option Example:
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – TEST (middle
position) by left clicking
A-10C
2. Press SEL rocker switch to select DISPLAY MODES.

3. Press ENT button to enter menu. 3b
4. Select the TAPES menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA rocker
switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Airspeed and Altitude tapes
as desired.
5. Select the RDRALT TAPE menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Radar Altitude tape as
desired.
6. Select the AIRSPEED menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle between airspeed types (Indicated Airspeed
(IAS), True Airspeed (TAS), Ground Speed (GS) or Indicated 6
Airspeed/Mach (IAS/MACH)). 7
7. Select the VERT VEL menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Vertical Velocity tape
as desired.
8. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – ON (UP
position) by right clicking
2 2
8b
2 SEL Rocker Switch
DATA Rocker Switch
3a
8a
441
AUTOPILOT
WARTHOG
The LAAP (Low Altitude Autopilot) has three main modes:
A-10C
• PATH (top LAAP switch position):

• This mode will attempt to keep the aircraft on its current flight path, represented by the total velocity vector symbol on the HUD. This mode will not engage
with a bank angle greater than 10-degrees.
• ALT/HDG (middle LAAP switch position):
• This mode will attempt to maintain the barometric altitude and heading of the aircraft when the mode was activated. This mode will not engage with a bank
angle greater than 10-degrees.
• ALT (down LAAP switch position):
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS
• When this mode is engaged, the autopilot will attempt to maintain current bank angle and barometric altitude.

Selector Switch
Autopilot Mode Engaged Indication
442
AUTOPILOT
WARTHOG 2 Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button
To use the LAAP (Low Altitude Autopilot):
A-10C
1. Select one of the three auto-pilot modes using the LAAP Mode Switch (PATH, ALT/HDG or ALT)
2. Engage autopilot by using either the Left Throttle Button or the Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button.
3. When engaged, Autopilot Mode is displayed on the HUD (Heads-Up Display).
4. If a control input is commanded while in autopilot, the active autopilot mode will automatically
disengage and a “WARNING, AUTOPILOT” message will be heard. You can also disengage autopilot by
pressing the Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button or Left Throttle Button.
Be advised: autopilot will only engage if you are flying level (+/- 5 degrees). Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode
Selector Switch 1
The A-10C does not include a route autopilot system that automatically flies the aircraft to a steerpoint • PATH: Keep current flight path
or along a loaded flight plan.
2
3
Left Throttle Button
Autopilot Mode Engaged Indication Toggles Autopilot
443
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT)
WARTHOG
Introduced into later versions of the A-10A, the Low Altitude Safety and Targeting Enhancement (LASTE) system provides several advancements to the A-10A and later
A-10C. Chief among them is the autopilot system, CCIP and CCRP bombing modes, air-to-air HUD mode, and the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control).
A-10C

Control) Switch
Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button

Radar Altimeter Switch

Selector Switch
LASTE (Low Altitude Safety and Targeting

Enhancement) Control Panel
444
GCAS (GROUND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM) Radar Altimeter Switch
WARTHOG
The GCAS (Ground Collision Avoidance System) provides you warning of a potential ground impact; however, it will not
prevent the impact. GCAS uses a combination of inputs from the radar altimeter, INS and LASTE computer to judge such
A-10C
an event. A GCAS warning is indicated by a large, flashing break-X on the HUD and a “PULL UP, PULL UP” audio message.
GCAS can provide you with an “ALTITUDE, ALTITUDE” audio alert messages when the aircraft is below a preset mean sea
level (MSL) altitude and above ground level (AGL) altitude. These altitudes are set on the Up Front Controller (UFC).
Note: If the RDR ALTM (Radar Altimeter) switch is in the NRM (normal) position, the radar altimeter is functioning and
will provide data for GCAS functions. If the RDR ALTM switch is in the DIS (disable) position, the radar altimeter is
disabled as well as GCAS functions.
PULL UP X Cue
GCAS BREAK Warning
445
GCAS (GROUND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM)
WARTHOG
There are situations where you could want to fly low in order to avoid SAM sites or enemy air defenses. In this case, the GCAS could be very irritating. Luckily for us, it
is possible to manually set the altitude at which the LOW ALTITUDE WARNING of the GCAS is triggered.
A-10C
How to set Low Altitude Warning

1. Press on the ALT ALRT (Altitude Alert) button on the UFC (Up Front Control) Scratchpad.
2. The current Altitude Alert (i.e. 500 ft AGL, Above Ground Level) will be displayed.
3. On the UFC Scratchpad, enter the desired Low Altitude Warning threshold you want to use. We will use 50.
4. Press ENT to set new Altitude Alert setting.
1
446
EAC (ENHANCED ATTITUDE CONTROL) SYSTEM
WARTHOG
The EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) system was one part of the LASTE
update to the A-10A that provides an autopilot capability. EAC uses sensor
A-10C
data from the Embedded GPS INS (EGI) navigation system, the Central Air
Data Computer (CADC) and the SAS, and then provides input into elevator
and yaw as part of the SAS.
The EAC system provides two major FCS functions:

• Precision Attitude Control (PAC): In PAC 1, pressing the trigger (first Gun Trigger
gun trigger detent) in Gun master mode will trim the aircraft through (Two Stages)
SAS to keep the gun pipper on the target point. PAC 2 is activated when
firing the gun (second gun trigger detent). Gun Trigger Pressed
• Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP): includes the autopilot modes of (First Detent): PAC1
Altitude/Bank Hold, Altitude/Heading Hold, and Path Hold modes.
GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude
Combined, the FCS of the A-10C provides a good, stable weapons platform Correction) Arming Switch
to accurately employ weapons from. • ARM: Gun Armed, PAC enabled
• SAFE: Gun Not Armed, PAC disabled
The EAC switch has two positions: OFF (down) and ARM (up). • GUNARM, Gun Armed, PAC disabled
• When in the ARM position, EAC is provided to LASTE.
• If in the OFF position, the EAC functions are disabled and the EAC
caution light appears.
Gun Trigger Pressed

(Second Detent): PAC2

Control) Switch

Selector Switch
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading 447
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT) CDU – SYS Sub-Page
WARTHOG WIND PROFILE CORRECTION
Winds have an effect on bombs, which can be managed with the help of Wind Correction functionalities of the LASTE.
A-10C
This is a complicated subject and forum user Boris was kind enough to provide an in-depth explanation on how to use it.
1
Bunyap’s Tutorial:
https://youtu.be/r5hCfUZZJhc
Boris’ forum thread:

https://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=124711
LASTE Wind/Temp Profile Spreadsheet

https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1rTUQqJYqq3yHsXjxUMA6MVvxgfI8nudMf8Nw95V2Mqk/edit#gid=0
448
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT)
WARTHOG WIND PROFILE CORRECTION
LASTE Wind/Temp Profile Spreadsheet
A-10C
https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1rTUQqJYqq3yHsXjxUMA6MVvxgfI8nudMf8Nw95V2Mqk/edit#gid=0
5
8
6
7
4
449
WARTHOG
NAVIGATION SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 – Navigation Introduction
A-10C
• 2 – Navigation Mode Select Panel

• 3 – TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) & Moving Map Display
• 4 – HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
• 5 – Navigation Point Types
• 6 – Waypoints
• 6.1 – Waypoint Navigation
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• 6.2 – How to Add Waypoints

• 6.3 – How to Edit Waypoints
• 6.4 – Waypoint Offset
• 7 – Markpoints
• 7.1 – Markpoint Navigation
• 7.2 – How to Add Markpoints
• 7.3 – Using Markpoints
• 8 – Flight Plans
• 8.1 – Creating a Flight Plan
• 8.2 – Using a Flight Plan
• 9 – Divert Function
• 10 – ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) Navigation
• 11 – TACAN Navigation
• 12 – Anchor Point/Bullseye
• 13 – ILS (Instrument Landing System) Tutorial
450
1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
Navigation in the A-10C is mostly done through the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), HUD (Heads-Up Display) and ADI (Attitude
Director Indicator) localizer & glide slope reference bars. The Standby Magnetic Compass can also be used as a backup. The A-10C uses a variety of navigation methods to
A-10C
direct you to mission locations. Depending on the mission or stage in the mission, you may use different navigation sources.

Magnetic Compass
ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
TAD (Tactical Awareness Display)
HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) 451

1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION Stick
WARTHOG
CONTROL INTERFACES
Throttle
A-10C
Navigation systems can be controlled with four main interfaces:

• CDU (Control Display Unit) and AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)
• CDU (Control Display Unit) Page Repeater and UFC (Up-Front
Control) Scratchpad
• NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
• HOTAS (Hands-On-Throttle-and-Stick) Controls depending on
the selected Sensor of Interest (SOI)
HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)

NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
CDU Page Repeater
AAP (Auxiliary
Avionics Panel)
UFC (Up-Front Control)
452
WARTHOG
EGI (EMBEDDED GPS & INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
A-10C
The EGI is the primary navigation system of the A-10C and provides accurate attitude, navigation, and vertical and horizontal steering information. If EGI fails, HARS can be
used as a backup. The Control Display Unit (CDU) is the primary interface device to the EGI, but can also be mirrored to an MFCD as the CDU Repeater Page.
EGI (Embedded GPS & Inertial

Navigation System) Power Switch
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode Selector

The CDU provides the control and
information interface between you and the
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) navigation system.
AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)

The AAP provides the power for both the
CDU and EGI (Embedded GPS/INS) systems.
453
WARTHOG
HARS (HEADING & ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM)
A-10C
The Heading Attitude Reference System (HARS) is a gyro-platform navigation system that served as the initial, primary navigation system of the A-10A. As the A-10A evolved
into later versions, EGI was added and HARS has become a back-up system to the Inertial Navigation System (INS) when the EGI is inoperative.
When the INS of the EGI is not available, HARS is selected automatically on the Navigation Mode Select Panel. You can also select it manually when EGI is working, but there
would be no good reason to do so. As a backup system, HARS can provide good heading and attitude information, but it can become inaccurate with hard maneuvering or if
taken out of Slave to compass mode. It also cannot provide a TVV (Total Velocity Vector) on the HUD.
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference
HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System) Mode Switch System) Mode Selector
• SLAVED: SLAVE mode, also called gyro-magnetic mode, allows the Compass LATITUDE Correction Setting Knob
HARS gyro to be fed by the compass signal.
• DG: Directional gyro mode. If Slave mode fails, the DG (Directional
Gyro) mode acts as a backup. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled
from the compass and works autonomously.
SYNC IND
Shows sync between HARS gyro and magnetic azimuth
detector. Used in SLAVED mode.
HDG (Heading) Knob

Heading & Push-to-Sync Control
Magnetic Variation Selector Switch
N-S Switch
Selects which hemisphere (North/South) is in for DG and SLAVED modes.
454
2 – NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL
WARTHOG
The primary means of selecting sources of navigation is the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel). From here you can determine what navigation is displayed on the HUD or
feeds data to your flight instruments like the ADI and HSI. When a selection is active, the green triangle on the button will light.
A-10C
There are two primary systems that can direct heading and attitude data. Both of these systems provide data to the HUD, ADI and HSI.
• HARS (Heading Attitude Reference System). This and the EGI button cannot be active at the same time. Pressing one will deactivate the other.
• EGI (Embedded GPS INS). This and the HARS button cannot be active at the same time. Pressing one will deactivate the other.
ABLE/STOW ADI (Attitude Director

Indicator) Localizer Bar Switch
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode

NMSP/NIMSIP: NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL Selector
• HARS and EGI send data to HUD, ADI and HSI and cannot be used at the same
time. HARS is usually used as a backup system to EGI.
• TISL, TACAN and ILS use beacons and stations to navigate to and cannot be TISL (Target Identification
used at the same time. Set Laser) Mode Selector
UHF Homing Light

When the UHF control panel is set to
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference ADF (Automatic Direction Finder)
System) Mode Selector mode, the UHF light will turn amber
STR PT (Steer Point) Mode Selector

Course Deviator Indicator (CDI) on the
FM Homing Light
When the VHF/FM control panel is set to
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
homing mode, the FM light will turn amber.
operates in relationship to a steer point.
ILS (Instrumented Landing

ANCHR (Anchor Point / Bullseye) System) Mode Selector
HSI and Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
needles will point to the Anchor Point TCN (TACAN) Mode Selector 455
(Bullseye).
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
OVERVIEW
A-10C
The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) is one of the most important tools at your disposal for navigation.
The TAD displays a plan-view of your current tactical situation

with the symbols representing your aircraft position (Ownship),
the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI), the Anchor Point/ Bullseye,
current steerpoint, active markpoint, datalink symbols, or
active flight plan with waypoints, and range rings.
The TAD can be a Sensor Of Interest (SOI) which can be used to

designate the SPI using a cursor that is controlled by the HOTAS
allowing the pilot to hook symbols on the display.
A moving map with different scales can also be displayed. This

map has multiple scales with each scale using a different air
navigation chart type.
The TAD page is accessed by either pressing a page select OSB

with the TAD label or using the HOTAS to cycle MFCD pages.
On the TAD, a slewable cursor is displayed that can be

commanded with the HOTAS slew functions when the TAD
page is the SOI. The cursor is your means to select
objects/symbols on the TAD.
TAD Page Selected 456

WARTHOG
MOVING MAP
A-10C
The moving map has three modes: MAN (Manual), AUTO (Automatic) and OFF.
• MAN: Map scale can only be changed manually with the ADJ +/- rocker switch.
• AUTO: Map scale is automatically changed. Each map chart format is automatically assigned to its
corresponding default map scale. Each TAD range scale for both the CEN (Centered Mode) and DEP
(Depressed Mode) ownship positions is automatically assigned to a corresponding map scale.
• OFF: Moving Map is removed but TAD symbology is still visible.
Range Scale
ADJ +/- Rocker Switch

Changes Map scale in MAN
mode only
Moving Map Mode Selector

MAN/AUTO/OFF
457
TAD Profile Selectors
WARTHOG TAD Control Menu Button ALL / LOFF / ACT / NONE
DISPLAY
A-10C
ADJ +/- Rocker Switch

Changes Map scale in MAN mode only
Range Scale
Bearing / Distance (nm) to Bullseye
(Anchor Point) Field-of-View Scale
Moving Map Mode Selector
MAN/AUTO/OFF
North Reference
TAD Cursor
Waypoint Symbol
Hook Mode Selector
(Waypoint 4)
TAD Copy Function SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (Waypoint 1)
• Function is only displayed if a symbol has first
been hooked. If a symbol is hooked and OSB is
pressed, the hooked symbol will be created as Coordinate Format
a new mission waypoint in the CDU LL: Latitude/Longitude
• If an open mission waypoint is available, the MGRS: Military Grid Reference System
number of the available waypoint will be listed OFF
with a “?” mark next to it (for example, “6?”).
Datalink SADL Network Configuration
Ownship Symbol
Bullseye / Anchor Point Hooked Symbol Aircraft

Ground Speed (kts) (if applicable)
Hooked Symbol Aircraft
Type (if applicable)
TAD Declutter Function
TAD Page Selector Button
Hooked Symbol Coordinates 458
WARTHOG
SYMBOLOGY
A-10C
TGP (Targeting Pod) Diamond

When the targeting pod (TGP) is on, a

green diamond is displayed on the TAD Waypoint/Steerpoint Symbol
that represents the line of sight point that
the TGP is pointed towards
Range Ring
Outer & Inner range rings are centered on the ownship symbol
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Symbol and provide you a quick means to judge ranges on the TAD. The
outside range ring represents the range set on the TAD scale,
from ownship symbol to outside range ring. For example, a 20
scale setting equates to 20 nautical miles between the ownship
symbol and the outside range ring.
Ownship Symbol (You!)

TAD Cursor Symbol
Bullseye (Anchor Point) Symbol
459
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY A-10C Legacy
Only
WARTHOG
CONTROLS (A-10C LEGACY) TAD Scale
A-10C
If the TAD is the current SOI (Sensor of Interest), HOTAS controls can provide a number of
interesting functions. To set the TAD as the SOI, press and hold the Coolie Hat Switch in the
direction of the MFCD screen displaying the TAD.
TAD Cursor
• FWD SHORT: Hook up TAD symbol
• AFT SHORT: Un-hook TAD symbol
Note: TAD symbols can include the SPI, TGP diamond, waypoint/steerpoint, or bullseye.

• FWD SHORT: TAD scale Increase Green Square
• AFT SHORT: TAD scale Decrease TAD is the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• RIGHT SHORT: TAD Center/Depressed Mode
• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: FOV (Field of View) EXP (Expand) Toggle
• AFT SHORT: Resets TAD cursor
• COOLIE HAT SWITCH

• LEFT/RIGHT/UP LONG: Sets SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• SLEW CONTROL SWITCH

• LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN: moves TAD cursor
China Hat Switch
DMS (Data Management Switch) Slew Control Switch

460
TMS (Target Management System) Switch Coolie Hat Switch
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER
CONTROLS (A-10C II TANK KILLER)
A-10C II
If the TAD is the current SOI (Sensor of Interest), HOTAS controls TAD Scale
can provide a number of interesting functions. To set the TAD as
the SOI, press and hold the Coolie Hat Switch in the direction of
the MFCD screen displaying the TAD. TAD Cursor
• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System Green Square

• FWD SHORT: Hook up TAD symbol TAD is the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
• AFT SHORT: Un-hook TAD symbol
Note: TAD symbols can include the SPI, TGP diamond, waypoint/steerpoint, or bullseye.

• FWD SHORT: TAD scale Increase
• FWD LONG: Map Quick Toggle
• AFT SHORT: TAD scale Decrease
• AFT LONG: Select TAD Center Option
• LEFT SHORT: CEN/DEP Mode CENTR OWN
• RIGHT SHORT: Cycle TAD Center/Depressed Mode
• RIGHT LONG: Slave TGP (Targeting Pod) to HMIT (Helmet-Mounted Integrated
Targeting) Line-of-Sight
• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: FOV (Field of View) EXP (Expand) Toggle
• AFT SHORT: Resets TAD cursor
• COOLIE HAT SWITCH

• LEFT/RIGHT LONG: Sets SOI (Sensor of Interest) China Hat Switch
• SLEW CONTROL SWITCH DMS (Data Management Switch) Slew Control Switch
• LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN: moves TAD cursor
461
TMS (Target Management System) Switch Coolie Hat Switch
WARTHOG
EXPANDED MODES EXP1 & EXP2 Map moves with TDC
A-10C
If the TAD is the current SOI (Sensor of Interest), the China Hat FWD SHORT will toggle NORM, EXP1 and EXP2
expanded modes each time the switch is pressed. The Slew Control Switch will then move the map itself.
• For EXP1: For any given TAD range scale, this causes the current digital map format to “narrow” by one
increment. In other words, if the current digital map scale in NORM mode was 1:2M, it will “narrow” to 1:1M
once EXP1 mode is entered, regardless of the TAD range scale that was initially displayed in NORM mode.
• For EXP2: For any given TAD range scale, this causes the current digital map format to “narrow” by one more
increment. In other words, if the current digital map scale in EXP1 mode was 1:1M (as is the case in the
previous paragraph), it will “narrow” to 1:500K once EXP2 mode is entered, regardless of the TAD range scale
that was initially displayed in NORM mode.
EXP1 Mode
China Hat Switch
Slew Control Switch
NORM Mode 462

EXP2 Mode
WARTHOG
ARS (ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYMBOL)
A-10C
In the lower left corner of each MFCD is the Attitude Reference Symbol (ARS). It provides you an
indication of the aircraft’s current pitch, roll and barometric altitude. The ARS symbol is composed of
three primary components:
• Ownship reference
• Ground reference
• Ownship altitude (073 = 7300 ft)
ARS (Attitude Reference Symbol)
Shown: 45 deg dive, banking slightly right, altitude 7300 ft
463
4 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
WARTHOG
The HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) is your primary gauge to assist in navigation to steerpoints, TACAN beacons, and radio beacons. While you will likely be using HUD
symbology for most of your navigation purposes, a firm understanding of the HSI is necessary for access to additional navigation data that is not present on the HUD or
A-10C
CDU displays, and in case of battle damage.

464
4 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
WARTHOG
A-10C
Lubber Line (Current Heading) Selected Heading Bug/Marker
Bearing Pointer 2 Course Selector Window

Points to current Steerpoint
Range Indicator (nm) Course Arrow
Bearing Pointer 1
Points to magnetic bearing of selected TACAN station when TACAN
mode is selected. When in ADF mode, this indicator points to
Power OFF Flag
magnetic bearing of the selected UHF station. If both TACAN and
ADF are selected, the ADF takes priority. If neither TACAN nor ADF
modes are selected, the indicator aligns with Bearing Pointer 1.
Aircraft Symbol Compass Card
CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) Bearing Validity Flag
TO-FROM Indicator
Heading Set Knob
Bearing Pointer 2 Reciprocal Heading
Bearing Pointer 1 Reciprocal Heading Course Set Knob
465
5 – NAVIGATION POINT TYPES
WARTHOG
These are the available Navigation Point types used in the Warthog:
A-10C
• Waypoints
• Waypoints are pre-planned navigational points of reference for you to follow on route to your area of operation. You can create new ones, edit their
coordinates and create flight plans with them. The CDU database can hold up to 2,050 waypoints. It is important to understand that any waypoint can be set as
the current steerpoint or anchor point.
• Steerpoint
• A Steerpoint is the waypoint or markpoint currently selected.
• Markpoints
• Markpoints are used to "mark" a point of interest, whether flying over an interesting area or an enemy sighting. You can create up to 26 markpoints; they are
numbered from A to Z.
• Anchor Point / Bullseye

• Also referred to as a “Bullseye”, an anchor point serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces.
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display

Unit) Page Selector Knob
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob • OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the
• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen. From OTHER you
active flight plan active. If selected, use of the Steerpoint will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view
toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT additional information.
PLAN must be selected to display the flight plan route on the • POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide
Tactical Awareness Display (TAD). information about your current position.
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints • STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed
will only cycle through the markpoints that you created (A-Z). information about your steerpoint.
Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used. • WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire view basic information about your selected waypoint,
mission waypoint database steerpoint, and your anchor point.
Steerpoint Increment/Toggle Switch 466

6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO DESIGNATE A STEERPOINT FROM WAYPOINT DATABASE
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION

(you access all waypoints available for the current mission)
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector
Knob to STEER 4a DMS (Data Management Switch)
3. Press Coolie Hat UP to set HUD (Heads-Up Display) as the Sensor of
Interest (SOI) 3a Coolie Hat Switch
4. Select what Waypoint you want to use as your current Steerpoint.

Three different methods are available:
• METHOD A (DMS): While HUD is SOI, press the DMS (Data
Management Switch) UP/DOWN to cycle between waypoints.
Each waypoint selected will be set as the Steerpoint
• METHOD B (CDU): On the CDU (Control Display Unit), use the
STEER switch on the CDU or the +/- Rocker Switch
5
• METHOD C (UFC): On the UFC (Up Front Control), use the STEER
rocker switch. Waypoint Number & Name acting as Steerpoint
5. Selected Waypoint acting as the Steerpoint will be displayed on the
HUD and CDU.
4c
4b 4b
3b
HUD is SOI
467
1 2
6 – WAYPOINTS
TMS (Target Management Master Mode Button
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION 3
System) Switch
1
B: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A STEERPOINT
A-10C
1. Once Steerpoint has been designated, cycle Master Mode to NAV using the Master Mode Button
2. Select STR PT Navigation Mode on the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
3. If the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) isn’t set to STPT (Steerpoint), press the TMS (Target Management
System) Switch AFT LONG to set the Steerpoint as the SPI. Make sure HUD is SOI (Sensor of Interest)
with the Coolie Hat UP
Steerpoint Bearing Pointers 1 & 2
4. Follow steering cues on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) and HUD (Heads-Up Display)
TVV (Total Velocity Vector) points towards Distance to Steerpoint (nm) Current Heading
the Steerpoint when STPT is the SPI
Steerpoint Symbology Selected Steerpoint Number / Name

40: Steerpoint is 40 degrees to your left
Square: Steerpoint Symbol
9.3: Distance to Steerpoint
1
Time to Go (TTG) and Time
on Target Delta (TOT)
3 HUD is SOI
Required Airspeed at Steerpoint to
meet DTOT (Desired Time-On-Target)
Desired Magnetic Heading

towards Steerpoint (327)
STPT (Steerpoint) is the SPI 3

2
(Sensor Point of Interest) Distance to Steerpoint (nm)
Shown: 9.4 nm to Steerpoint Current Time
468
6 – WAYPOINTS
A-10C
North Reference
Waypoint Symbol
(Waypoint 3)
Steerpoint set to SPI

(Waypoint 1)
Ownship Symbol

towards Steerpoint
469
6 – WAYPOINTS
A-10C
Tadpole Indicates Steerpoint

Direction when SPI is not Steerpoint
TDC (Target Designation Cue) is the

SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
470
6 – WAYPOINTS 2c
C: CONSULTING WAYPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all waypoints
available for the current mission)
2. To consult data on a desired waypoint:
a) Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to WAYPT. This
will display the WP INFO Page.
b) On the CDU keypad, enter desired waypoint number (i.e. “2” for Waypoint 2).
c) Press LSK (Line Select Key) next to Waypoint Number Field.
2b
WP INFO Page
Waypoint Number Waypoint Data

Waypoint Name
Time-to-Go to Waypoint
Heading to Waypoint/Distance to Waypoint (nm)
Detailed WAYPOINT
Data Selector
1
2a
Steerpoint Data Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data

Time-to-Go to Steerpoint Time-to-Go to Anchor Point
Heading to Steerpoint/Distance to Steerpoint (nm) Heading to Anchor Point/Distance to Anchor Point (nm)
471
6 – WAYPOINTS
C: CONSULTING WAYPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C
Detailed WAYPOINT Data Page

3b
3. To consult further data on Waypoint 2, press LSK (Line Waypoint Name
Select Key) next to WAYPOINT.
4. Use the Page Increment/Decrement Rocker switch to Desired Time-On-Target
cycle between WAYPOINT pages 1 and 2.
Waypoint Number Copy Data to Available

Mission Point No. 6

3a
Waypoint Elevation (ft)
Wind Heading / Speed (kts)
Waypoint Coordinates
Coordinate Display Selector

Page 1 of 2 LL: Latitude/Longitude
UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator
Waypoint Name
Waypoint Number
Waypoint Scale Mode

Enroute VNAV (Vertical Navigation)
Terminal Mode Selector
Approach 2D / 3D
High Accuracy
4 Waypoint Steering Mode

TO-FROM
TO-TO
DIRECT
Desired Time-To-Go Page 2 of 2

Desired Time-On-Target
472
6 – WAYPOINTS Time-To-Go to Steerpoint Waypoint Name acting as Steerpoint
Waypoint Number acting as Steerpoint
Steerpoint Data
D: CONSULTING STEERPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C
• DMH: Desired Magnetic Required Airspeed at

Heading to Steerpoint
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Steerpoint (kts)
• DIS: Distance to Steerpoint (nm)
RIAS: Indicated Airspeed
Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all • EL: Steerpoint Elevation (ft)
RTAS: True Airspeed
waypoints available for the current mission). RGS: Ground Speed
2. To consult data on the selected Steerpoint, Bearing (BRG) or Radial (RAD) to
set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU Steerpoint
(Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to Airspeed Display Selector
STEER. This will display the STEERPOINT Selects Data for Waypoint IAS: Indicated Airspeed
INFO Page. acting as Steerpoint TAS: True Airspeed
GS: Ground Speed
Arrival Time-On-Target to Steerpoint

Current Airspeed (kts)
IAS: Indicated Airspeed
TAS: True Airspeed
GS: Ground Speed
1
2 473
6 – WAYPOINTS 4a
WARTHOG 6.2 – HOW TO ADD WAYPOINTS
A-10C
available for the current mission).

2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will allow
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the WP (Waypoint) FSK.
4. Select the WAYPOINT branch.
5. Select the "Copy to available mission point" LSK (?6 as shown in image below).
6. This will copy the contents of the selected waypoint into an available mission point slot that is not
currently being used (slot 6 in the case below). 3
4b
474
6 – WAYPOINTS
7. Select desired coordinate format.
A-10C
• L/L stands for Latitude/Longitude.

• UTM stands for Universal Transverse Mercator, which is related to MGRS (Military Grid Reference
8
System) coordinate format.
• We will choose L/L for simplicity. See the GBU-38 JTAC tutorial for UTM coordinates.
8. We will add the coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB:
• 37°13’08’’ North 115°47’07’’ West (Deg, minutes, seconds)
• 37°13.133’ North 115°47.116’ West (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes)
• Elevation 4494 ft
9. Enter the latitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (3713133) and press the LSK (Line
Select Key) next to the latitude field (N or S).
10. Enter the longitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (11547116) and press the LSK next to
the longitude field (E or W).
11. Enter the elevation of the new waypoint in feet using the keypads/scratchpad (4494) and press the LSK next
to the elevation field (EL).
12. Enter a unique name for the new waypoint (i.e. NAV WP006) using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK
next to the name field.
13. And that’s it! Your new waypoint is now created.
12b
9a
10a
11b
11a
9b
12a
10b
7
475
6 – WAYPOINTS
A-10C
New Waypoint can be selected

as shown in section 6.1
476
6 – WAYPOINTS 4a
WARTHOG 6.3 – HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS
A-10C
available for the current mission)

5. Select the waypoint you want to edit entering its number on the CDU keypad, then selecting the LSK
(Line Select Key) next to the Waypoint Number field.
3
4b
5a
5b
Name of existing waypoint 4
477
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.3 – HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS
6. We will modify Waypoint 4’s coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) to the coordinates
A-10C
for Groom Lake AFB:

• 37°13’08’’ North 115°47’07’’ West (Deg, minutes, seconds)
6
• 37°13.133’ North 115°47.116’ West (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes)
• Elevation 4494 ft
7. Edit the latitude of the existing waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (3713133) and press
the LSK (Line Select Key) next to the latitude field (N or S).
8. Edit the longitude of the existing waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (11547116) and
press the LSK next to the longitude field (E or W).

9. Edit the elevation of the existing waypoint in feet using the keypads/scratchpad (4494) and
press the LSK next to the elevation field (EL).
7a
8a
9b
9a
7b
8b
478
6 – WAYPOINTS Waypoint Number
6
WARTHOG 6.4 – WAYPOINT OFFSET (OSET)
1. If a target location is given to you in relationship to an existing waypoint, you can
A-10C
create a new waypoint with the “Waypoint Offset” function. In this example, the
target is located 0.84 nm of Waypoint 1 with a Magnetic Heading of 346 deg.
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access
all waypoints available for the current mission).
3. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER.
This will allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
4. Press the OSET (Offset) FSK.
5. On the CDU keypad, enter reference waypoint number that we will use to set the
offset from (i.e. “1” for Waypoint 1).
6. Press LSK (Line Select Key) next to Waypoint Number Field.
4
5
Target
Waypoint 1 2 3 479
(MSN000)
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.4 – WAYPOINT OFFSET (OSET)
Target
7. Our Target position is Waypoint 1 offset by 0.84 nm at a bearing of 346 deg Magnetic.
A-10C
8. On the CDU keypad enter Magnetic Heading and Distance Offset. Magnetic heading and distance are entered
as HHHDD.T when the distance is less than 100 NM, HHHDDD.T when the distance is 100 NM or more but less
than 1000 NM, and HHHDDDD.T when the distance is 1000 NM or more and equal to or less than 9999.9 NM.
As an example, we will enter 34600.8 (magnetic heading 346, distance 0.8 nm). Don’t forget the dot between
00 and 8.
9. Press on the LSK next to MH/DIS to enter Magnetic Heading and Distance offset.
10. On the CDU keypad, type the desired Offset Waypoint name (OFFSET1).
11. Select the "Copy to available mission point" LSK (?2 as shown in image below).
12. This will copy the contents of the selected waypoint offset into an available mission point slot that is not
currently being used (slot 2 in the case below).
13. The new waypoint generated from Waypoint 1 offset will be called OFFSET1 and can be selected like any other
normal waypoint. Waypoint 1
(MSN000)
9a
9b
8
11 13
480
10
7 – MARKPOINTS 6 Master Mode Button
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A MARKPOINT
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you access
all markpoints)
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to
OTHER
3. Press Coolie Hat UP to set HUD (Heads-Up Display) as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) DMS (Data Management Switch) 4
4. Select what Markpoint you want to use as your current Steerpoint. Three different
methods are available and are listed in the WAYPOINT section. We will use the
DMS switch method.
• While HUD is SOI, press the DMS (Data Management Switch) UP/DOWN to
cycle between waypoints. Each markpoint selected will be set as the
Steerpoint
5. Selected Markpoint acting as the Steerpoint will be displayed on the HUD and
CDU.
6. Once Steerpoint has been designated, cycle Master Mode to NAV using the
Master Mode Button
7. Select STR PT Navigation Mode on the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
7
Coolie Hat Switch 3

6
3 HUD is SOI 4
1
481
2
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A MARKPOINT
A-10C
8. If the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) isn’t set to STPT (Steerpoint),

press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch AFT LONG to
set the Steerpoint/Markpoint as the SPI. Make sure HUD is SOI
(Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat UP.
Markpoint Bearing Pointers 1 & 2
9. Follow steering cues on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
and HUD (Heads-Up Display) 8
System) Switch
Current Heading
Distance to Markpoint (nm)
Distance to Markpoint (nm) Markpoint Symbol

Shown: 5.3 nm to Markpoint
Markpoint Number / Name
HUD is SOI
Time to Go (TTG)
Current Time

towards Markpoint
STPT (Steerpoint) is the SPI 482
8
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION 4
B: HOW TO CONSULT MARKPOINT DATA FROM THE CDU

A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you access all markpoints)
5. Select the markpoint you want to consult entering its number on the CDU keypad, then selecting the 3
LSK (Line Select Key) next to the Waypoint Number field. We will select Markpoint C.
• Alternatively, you could also use the +/- rocker key to cycle between markpoints.
5a
Detailed WAYPOINT Data Page

Markpoint Number Markpoint Name
5b Desired Time-On-Target
Copy Data to Available +/- Rocker Key
Markpoint Elevation (ft) Mission Point No. 7
Markpoint Coordinates
Wind Heading / Speed (kts) Coordinate Display Selector

LL: Latitude/Longitude
UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator
1
2 483
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.2 – HOW TO ADD MARKPOINTS
There are three main methods to create markpoints:
A-10C
Overhead Markpoint Weapon Release Button

• If you press the MK (markpoint) button on the CDU, a new markpoint will
be created at the aircraft location. Each time you press the MK button, a
new markpoint will be created in A-Y order (Z is reserved for a weapon
release markpoint).
Designated Markpoint
• A point on the ground can be set as a markpoint as determined by the line

of sight of an aircraft designation source. These sources include the HUD
TDC, the Targeting Pod, Maverick Seeker, or TAD Cursor. To create a
markpoint in this fashion, place the designation point at the desired
location and then perform a TMS RIGHT SHORT press on the control stick.
• Each TMS right short press will create a new markpoint in order (A-Y). TMS (Target Management
• For A-10C II TANK KILLER EXPANSION: TMS RIGHT LONG will create a SPI System) Switch
(Sensor Point of Interest) on the last created Markpoint.
• To consult an example of how a markpoint is created using a TGP, see
Weapons section 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (TARGETING POD).
Weapon Event
• Each time a weapon is released, a Z markpoint is created. Each
subsequent weapon release replaces the last Z markpoint.
MK Button (Overhead
Markpoint Creation)
484
7 – MARKPOINTS A-10C II Tank Killer
Expansion Only
TANK KILLER 7.2 – HOW TO ADD MARKPOINTS
For owners of the A-10C II “Tank Killer” expansion, there is also an
A-10C II
additional way to create markpoints with the HMCS (Helmet-Mounted

Cueing System):
Markpoint Creation via HMCS

1. Turn on HMCS Power using the HMCS POWER switch.
2. Set the HMCS as the SOI (press the Coolie Hat Switch DOWN). Make sure the
HMCS SOI Asterisk is visible. HMCS SOI (Sensor of HMD Crosshair
3. Press China Hat AFT SHORT to recage the HDC (Helmet Designation Cursor) to Interest) Asterisk
the HMD Crosshair
4. Move your helmet to place the HMD crosshair near the desired target you want
to designate and create a markpoint over.
5. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the ground-stabilized HDC over the target
you want to create a markpoint on. Markpoint (MRK A)
6. Once HDC is over the desired target, press TMS (Target Management System)
RIGHT SHORT to create a markpoint on the HDC.
7. (Optional) You can create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the last created
markpoint by pressing TMS RIGHT LONG. HDC (Helmet Designation
8. In order to view all available markpoints, set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Cursor)
Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you will access all markpoints).
AAP Steerpoint Selector

Knob – Set to MARK
Slew Control Switch
China Hat Switch

TMS (Target Management Scorpion HMCS (Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Power Switch
System) Switch Coolie Hat Switch • ON (FWD): Power to the HMCS through the aircraft electrical power supply system 485
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.3 – USING MARKPOINTS
You can use markpoints just like regular waypoints. This means that they can be used to slave other sensors to them (i.e. targeting pod or Maverick Missile). An example
A-10C
of that is available in the Weapons section 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (TARGETING POD).
Maverick and TGP Slaved China Hat Switch FWD LONG

Allows you to slave all sensors (TGP, Maverick, etc.) to the SPI
to Markpoint/STPT
(Sensor Point of Interest), but only if current STPT (Steerpoint) is set
to a markpoint and this steerpoint is the SPI.
Selected Markpoint
Markpoint/STPT is the SPI

Maverick Page (Slaved

to Markpoint/STPT)
Targeting Pod (TGP) Page

(Slaved to Markpoint/STPT)
486
8 – FLIGHT PLANS
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
A Flight Plan is a pre-determined sequence of up to 40 waypoints. You can have multiple flight plans available.
A-10C
The advantage of the Flight Plan is that it allows you to:

• View all waypoints of interest at once
• Drawing of lines between waypoints on the TAD (route)
• Ability to cycle through each waypoint in the Flight Plan and the selected Flight Plan waypoint becomes the steerpoint
• Create multiple Flight Plans
Flight Plan Selected

No Flight Plan Selected
487
8 – FLIGHT PLANS
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to FLT PLAN. FLT PLAN must be selected
A-10C
to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK). Existing Flight Plan
3. Press the FPM (Flight Plan Menu) FSK.
4. On the CDU keyboard, type the name of the new flight plan you want to create (i.e. FLTPLN2).
5. Press the LSK (Line Select Key) next to the NEW FP field to create the new FLTPLN2 flight plan.
6. Press the LSK next to FPBUILD FLTPLN2 to enter the Flight Plan Build page.
7. The FPBUILD page lists all waypoints selected to make the Flight Plan.
3
Flight Plan FLTPLN2 Composition
Waypoint Waypoint Flight Plan
Number Name Sequence Index
00 INIT POSIT 01
01 MSN000 02 4a
5 02 MSN1 03
03 MSN2 04
04 MSN3 05
05 MSN4 06
4b
1
2 488
8 – FLIGHT PLANS 8 Waypoint 03
MSN2
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN 9a Waypoint 04
MSN3
8. We want to select Waypoints 0 (INIT POSIT, initial aircraft position), 10a
A-10C
1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 to build our flight plan with.

11a Waypoint 05
9. Enter Waypoint Number 00 (Init Posit Waypoint) on the CDU MSN4
keyboard, then press LSK next to “01” to assign the first waypoint. 13a
10. Enter Waypoint Number 01 (MSN000 Waypoint) on the CDU
keyboard, then press LSK next to “02” to assign second waypoint. Waypoint 02
11. Enter Waypoint Number 02 (MSN1 Waypoint) on the CDU MSN1
12b
keyboard, then press LSK next to “03” to assign third waypoint. Waypoint 00
12. Press Page Selector Rocker Switch to go to Page 2. INIT POSIT

13. Enter Waypoint Number 03 (MSN2 Waypoint) on the CDU
keyboard, then press LSK next to “04” to assign fourth waypoint.
Waypoint 01
14. Repeat for Waypoint Number 04 (fifth waypoint) and Waypoint
MSN000
Number 05 (sixth waypoint).
9c
10c
9b 10b
11c 11b
13c
14
13b
12a 489
12c
8 – FLIGHT PLANS Existing Flight Plans
WARTHOG 8.2 – USING A FLIGHT PLAN

To select a flight plan from the list of available flight plans:
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to FLT PLAN. FLT PLAN must be
selected to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will
allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the FPM (Flight Plan Menu) FSK.
4. Press on the LSK next to the flight plan you want to select (FLTPLN2 in our case). The asterisk
will indicator the active flight plan.

3
5. To select either “Automatic” or “Manual” waypoint sequencing, you can press on the LSK next
to your active flight plan to toggle the AUTO or MAN mode. “Automatic Waypoint Sequencing”
is a fancy way of saying that when you are close enough to the selected steerpoint/waypoint,
the navigation system will select the next waypoint in the flight plan sequence automatically.
Selected Flight Plan

1
Flight Plan Sequencing Mode
2 490
8 – FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan FLTPLN2 Composition
WARTHOG 8.2 – USING A FLIGHT PLAN Waypoint

Number
Waypoint
Name
Flight Plan
Sequence Index
6. On the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), you will now see 00 INIT POSIT 01
A-10C
that waypoints in the flight plan sequence are now linked

01 MSN000 02
with green lines.
02 MSN1 03
03 MSN2 04
04 MSN3 05
05 MSN4 06
Waypoint 02 Waypoint 02
MSN1 MSN1
FLTPLN2 Flight Plan
Current Steerpoint
Waypoint Sequence
491
9 – DIVERT FUNCTION
WARTHOG
If you are lost, you can use the CDU (Control Display Unit) to help you find a place to
land. The “DIVERT” function offers you information on the closest airfields available.
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to
OTHER. This will allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
2. Make your HUD SOI by pressing COOLIE HAT UP SHORT. 1
3. Select CDU (Control Display Unit) page.
4. On the UFC, press “FUNC” (function) and “2” (NAV functions)
5. On the CDU page, a new NAV menu will appear. Press the OSB to select the
2a
“DIVERT” menu.
2b HUD is SOI
Coolie Hat Switch
4a
4b
5a 5c
5b
3 492
9 – DIVERT FUNCTION
WARTHOG
6. The divert menu will display the closest airfields to you. If we want to go to Khasab, just by having a quick look
at it, we know that Khasab is already stocked in our computer in WAYPOINT 60. We also know that we need to
A-10C
go to a heading of 125 for 14.5 nautical miles, with a TTG (time to go) of about 2 minutes 58 seconds.
7. If we select the Khasab OSB, we can have even more details in the FLDINFO (Field Information) page.
8. The FLDINFO menu for Khasab shows us that there is one runway oriented at 190 with an elevation of 48 ft
and a length of 7513 ft, that there is an ILS system in place set at frequency 110.30, that there is a TACAN
station set to 84 and that the radio frequency to communicate with the control tower is 124.350.
9. Even better: if you look at your HUD you will now see that Khasab is your current steerpoint and that the HUD
is showing you where to go to find it.
10. If you want to find another airfield or follow another waypoint, since your HUD is already SOI you can simply
use DMS UP SHORT or DMS DOWN SHORT to cycle through more waypoints. DMS (Data Management Switch)
9
7b
7a
493
10 – ADF (AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER) NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
The Automatic Direction Finder of the A-10C can only track radio transmissions sent on either UHF FM or VHF FM frequency bands. This means that it cannot track
NDBs in the KHz frequency range.
A-10C
494
10 – ADF (AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER) NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
1. On Navigation Mode Select Panel, make sure ILS and TCN buttons are not selected
2. Set UHF Mode to ADF Lubber Line (Current Heading)
A-10C
3. Set UHF Frequency to MNL (Manual) Mode.

4. Set UHF manual frequency to 255.000 MHz.
5. Confirm UHF signal is received with the UHF HOMING light illuminated.
6. On HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), follow Bearing Pointer 1. Keep in mind that
no range information is available.
Aircraft Symbol 6
4
Bearing Pointer 1
3
2
1
495
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations are navigation aids
typically used by the military and provide you directional and You are here
A-10C
distance guidance. They can be installed on airdromes, air

refueling tankers or even aircraft carriers.
1. We will track Kutaisi’s TACAN 44X.

2. Power up the TACAN control panel by setting the Mode
Selector to T/R (Transmit-Receive).
3. Set the KTS TACAN frequency (44X) on the TACAN panel. KTS TACAN
1
Clicking on the right knob sets X/Y, while scrolling mousewheel
44X
on left and right selector knobs set 44.
4. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Selection Panel), press “TCN”
to slave the HSI to the TACAN beacon
5. Set the desired course to the TACAN using the HSI Course
Select knob (068)
Selected Course 5b
Course Set Knob 5a
3 2
4 496
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION Bearing Pointer 1
Lubber Line (Current Heading) Points to magnetic bearing of
WARTHOG selected TACAN station when
6. After a few seconds, the HSI will display DME (Distance
TACAN mode is selected.
Measuring Equipment) distance to the TACAN in nautical
A-10C
miles.
7. Steer the aircraft towards the TACAN CDI (Course Deviation
Indicator) Reference Line. As you approach the radial, the
line deviation with the centerline of the HSI will gradually
Range Indicator (nm)
diminish.
8. The direction of the TACAN beacon will be displayed by the
pointy end of the Course arrow and Bearing Pointer 1 . Course Arrow Selected Course
9. CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) will indicate how far off
the TACAN radial course (068) you are.

10. When CDI Reference line is centered, this means you are on
the 068 radial.
11. Then, turn towards the TACAN Bearing Pointer 1 (or course
needle) to follow the radial to the runway. Aircraft Symbol TACAN CDI (Course Deviation
Indicator)
Fly towards this line!
Bearing Pointer 1 Reciprocal Heading
Course Set Knob
497
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
A-10C
a b c d
b
a
d
c
KTS TACAN
Channel 44X
498
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE
WARTHOG
A “Bullseye” or “Anchor Point” is a fictional point in space that serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces. If you know where the
bullseye is and the enemy doesn’t, it gives you a way to communicate positions without the enemy knowing where to look from. Your wingmen and AWACS will often refer
A-10C
to “bulls” or “bullseye” on the radio. A bullseye call, used to communicate your position, is done in the following format:
• Bearing from bullseye

• Range from bullseye
• Altitude
Bullseye Explanation by JediLinks: https://youtu.be/vgcXcfeGb2M

Bullseye / Anchor Point
(Set on Waypoint 2)
Bullseye, 17 nm
Bearing 180 from
Hornet 411
Hornet 421
You
499
WARTHOG
You can set the bullseye on any existing waypoint available in your database. This short tutorial will show you how to create an “Anchor Point” on Waypoint 2 and use it
as bullseye reference.
A-10C
Desired Bullseye / Anchor Point

Location (Waypoint 2)
Desired Bullseye / Anchor Point

Location (Waypoint 2)
You
You
Current Bullseye / Anchor Point Location

Current Bullseye / Anchor Point Location
500
WARTHOG
To set an Anchor Point on a Waypoint (i.e. Waypoint 02):
A-10C
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob

to MISSION (you access all waypoints available for the
current mission) 3
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit)
Selector Knob to WAYPT. This will display the WP INFO Page.
3. Select ANCHOR PT branch
4. On CDU keypad, enter waypoint number you want to use as
the new Bullseye / Anchor Point Reference (02).
5. Press on the LSK next to the Waypoint Number field.

6. Press on the LSK next to HUD OFF to display Anchor Point /
Bullseye information on the Heads-Up Display.
7 4a
7. Select ANCHR mode on Navigation Mode Select Panel
5a
6a
4b
5b
1
Anchor Point has not 2
been defined yet
6b 501
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE Anchor Point Reference Waypoint Number
WARTHOG Current Waypoint Name
8. New Anchor Point is now set on Waypoint 2. Consult Anchor Point Reference
CDU, HUD, HSI and TAD for bullseye information. Waypoint Name
A-10C
Note: we took an existing waypoint and set it as the Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data
Anchor Point, but we could have also created a new Time-to-Go to Anchor Point
waypoint and called it “Bullseye2”. Desired Magnetic Heading to Anchor Point
Distance to Anchor Point (nm)
Current Waypoint Data
Time-to-Go to Waypoint
Heading to Waypoint
Distance to Waypoint (nm)
Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data

Reference Waypoint Name
North Reference Desired Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point /Distance from Anchor Point (nm)
DMH
Anchor Point (Bullseye)
043 Set on Waypoint 2
You
Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data

Desired Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point / Distance from Anchor Point (nm)
502
13 – ILS (INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM) TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
1. ILS approach
2. Final Approach
A-10C
3. Outer ILS marker

4. Inner ILS marker
5. Missed Approach
503
WARTHOG
Our ILS approach will be done to Batumi airfield. Using our CDU trick learned in the “DIVERT” sub-section, we can easily find the ILS frequency (110.30), runway
heading (120 Magnetic Heading / 126 True Heading) and radio tower frequency (131.000).
A-10C
504
WARTHOG
1. Set your VHF radio to TR (transmit-receive), set frequency mode to MAN and set frequency to 131.000. Then, call the tower for inbound request.
2. Turn ILS (Instrument Landing System) power ON by right clicking on the PWR switch.
A-10C
3. Enter ILS frequency 110.30 rotating the PWR and VOL knobs with the mousewheel.
4. Set your HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) course to 120 (runway magnetic heading) with your mousewheel.
5. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Selection Panel), set homing mode to ILS and navigate towards runway.
1c
4
1a
1b
5
3 505
WARTHOG
6. Align yourself with the runway using the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator),
CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) and ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
A-10C
Localizer Steering Bar
Localizer Steering Bar

Distance to Runway (nm)
CDI (Course Deviation Indicator)
c
b
a b c
506
13 – ILS (INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM) TUTORIAL Both Localizer & Glide Slope
Steering Bars are centered.
WARTHOG
7. Once you are close enough to the ILS (approx. 10 nm), the 7b Glide Slope Steering Bar 8 You are set for landing!
Glide Slope Fail Flag will disappear and provide you
A-10C
guidance in the vertical plane to perform an approach

with 3 degrees of glide slope.
8. Fly the aircraft to the glide slope by using the Glide Slope
Steering bar and Glide Slope Deviation Indicator. Both
should be centered.
Glide Slope Deviation Indicator
7a
Localizer Steering Bar Glide Slope Deviation Indicator

must be centered as well
Glide Slope Fail Flag

Localizer Steering Bar Centered
= Localizer is captured!
507
WARTHOG
6. When you have captured the ILS localizer (no lateral deviation from runway axis) and captured the glide slope as well, deploy landing gear.
7. Deploy flaps (fully extended) and airbrakes (40 % extended)
A-10C
8. Adjust throttle and trim the aircraft to get a good Angle of Attack for landing. The AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer should display a “circle”, which means that you are “On
Speed”. This means that the angle of attack you have will maintain an adequate airspeed for landing.
9. Use Radar Altitude as a reference
10. On Glide Path Final Approach
• -500 ft/min descent rate
11. Touchdown by letting yourself glide on the runway.
12. No need to flare.
Radar Altimeter (ft)

The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated
green and yellow symbols.
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and
low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.
Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is 508
down.
WARTHOG
A-10C
509
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING WARTHOG
510
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – WHY WE ALL HATE IT
WARTHOG
Air-to-air refueling is one of the hardest, most hated, and most frustrating tasks in DCS. Ever. Of all time.
A-10C
Why? Well, one of the main reasons for the difficulty behind refueling is the skill required to do formation flying. Flying in
formation with another aircraft requires much more practice than you would initially think. Another reason is pure physics:
there is this thing called “wake turbulence”. An aircraft flies through a fluid: air. Just like with any fluid, if you have something
that displaces itself through it at a certain speed, the fluid will become disrupted (turbulence). Wingtip vortices and jetwash
are both effects of this simple concept. Wake turbulence is the reason why airliners need to wait a minimum time between
takeoffs: flying through disrupted air will destabilize the aircraft and it is unsafe, especially during critical phases of flight like
takeoff and landing.
Unfortunately, wake turbulence is something a pilot has to deal with during air-to-air refueling. This is why the aircraft will fly
just fine when approaching the tanker, but start wobbling around when flying in close proximity of the refueling boom and
tanker engines.
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
NOTE:
Some pilots prefer to set their joystick to
pitch and roll axes curvatures set with a
curve of 15 and a deadzone of 5. Control
curves are up to your personal
preference.
511
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
WARTHOG 1
1. Read your mission briefing to know the TACAN station channel of your KC-135
Tanker (10X) and the VHF AM channel frequency you can communicate with it
A-10C
(150.000).
2. Set your TACAN to “A/A T/R” and to tanker TACAN frequency (10X) by scrolling the
mousewheel.
3. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel), press “TCN” to slave the HSI to the
TACAN beacon.
4. Set your VHF AM radio to T/R and channel 150.000.
5. Press Mic Switch FWD and contact tanker (F6).
4
6. Select “Intent to refuel” in the tanker menu. The tanker will give you an altitude
(usually 20,000 ft or 10,000 ft) to rendezvous at.
7. Use the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) to line up with the KC-135 tanker.
Needle with a “1” on it points towards the tanker. Distance to tanker is displayed on
the HSI.
7
7
3 512
WARTHOG
8. Open fuel trap door.
9. Once you are close enough, call the tanker to begin pre-contact. If you are not lined up properly, he will tell
A-10C
you “Return”. If you are lined up properly, he will grant you permission to approach.
10. Make sure you are perfectly trimmed before beginning your approach.
11. Set all your weapon systems to SAFE.
12. Fly formation with the tanker, not the boom.
13. Make sure the “READY” light is lit.
8
9
13
513
A-10C
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING WARTHOG
514
WARTHOG
14. Once contact with the boom is done, you will have a “LATCHED” notice. Use the tanker’s engines as a reference to maintain contact.
15. If you disconnect the boom prematurely (and it WILL happen, trust me), make sure that you press your “Nosewheel Steering” pinky switch on your HOTAS joystick
A-10C
(or “INSERT” key binding) to reset your fuel trap door. If you fail to reset it, the boom operator will not be able to make contact with your trap door again (refueling
light will display “READY” again).
515
WARTHOG
16. Refueling procedure will be done when you have the “DISCONNECT” warning light.
17. Close fuel trap door and resume flight.
A-10C
Here is a nice Air-to-Air refueling example: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2qFrmfNEilM

Special thanks to Derbysieger for creating a helpful written tutorial as well http://steamcommunity.com/sharedfiles/filedetails/?id=170423297
516
RESOURCES
WARTHOG
Bunyap’s Youtube Channel
https://www.youtube.com/user/4023446/playlists
A-10C
Gerry Abbott’s Youtube Channel

https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL8E198A311F28EA74
Ralfidude’s Idiot Guide to the A-10C: Quick Tips

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9M8yiAjQ7ps
Eagle Dynamics A-10C Wiki

http://en.wiki.eagle.ru/wiki/DCS_A-10C_Guides,_Tutorials_and_Reference_Documents
A-10C Manuals and Books (awesometacular resource!)

http://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=60293
PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES
VTAG Handbook
http://vtacticalairgroup.net/downloads/common/VTAG%20Handbook.pdf
VTAG SOP (Standard Operating Procedures)

http://vtacticalairgroup.net/downloads/a-10/VTAG%20SOP.pdf
476th Virtual Fighter Group Database

http://www.476vfightergroup.com/downloads.php
476th Virtual Fighter Group Guides

http://www.476vfightergroup.com/downloads.php?do=cat&id=43
476th Virtual Fighter Group Youtube Channel

https://www.youtube.com/user/476vFG/videos
Rob10’s Weapon List

http://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=73752
517
ACRONYM TABLE (1/2)
WARTHOG
Countermeasure Set
A-A Air-to-Air ASL Azimuth Steering Line CMSP EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature GS Ground Speed
Panel
A-10C
Inertially Aided
A-G Air-to-Ground ATC Air Traffic Control CR Coordinate Ranging EHE Expected Horizontal Error IAM
Munition
Engine Monitoring
AAP Auxiliary Avionics Panel BATA Bullets at Target Altitude CR Consent to Release EMI IAS Indicated Airspeed
Instruments
AAS Air-to-Air Submenu BHOT Black Hot DLZ Dynamic Launch Zone EO Electro Optical IFF Identify Friend or Foe
Armament Control Integrated Flight and
ACP BIT Built In Test DMS Data Management Switch ET Elapsed Time IFFCC
Panel Fire Control Computer
Automatic Direction Central Air Data Instrumented Landing
ADF CADC DP Display Page EVE Expected Vertical Error ILS
Finding Computer System
Attitude Direction Captive Air Training Inertial Navigation
ADI CATM DRA Dual Rail Adapter FA Fault Acknowledge INS
Indicator Missile System
Firing Evaluation Display Interstage Turbine
AGL Above Ground Level CBU Cluster Bomb Unit DRC Desired Release Cue FEDS ITT
System Temperature
Digital Stores Heading Attitude

AGM Air-to-Ground Missile CCD Charged Coupled Device DSMS FLIR Forward Looking Infrared HARS
Management System Reference System
Armament HUD Continuously Computed High Explosive,
AHCP CCIP DTOT Desired Time On Target FM Frequency Modulation HEI
Control Panel Impact Point Incendiary
Continuously Computed
AIM Air Intercept Missile CCRP DTS Data Transfer System FOM Figure of Merit HOF Height of Function
Release Point
Course Deviation Digital Terrain System Hands On Throttle and
AM Amplitude Modulation CDI DTSAS FOV Field of View HOTAS
Indicator Application Software Stick
Horizontal Position
AMIL Air Mass Impact Line CDU Control Display Unit DTTG Desired Time To Go GBL Gun Bore Line HPU
Uncertainty
Central Interface Control Enhanced Attitude Horizontal Situation
AOA Angle of Attack CICU EAC GBU Guided Bomb Unit HSI
Unit Control Indicator
Electronic Ground Collision Avoidance
APU Auxiliary Power Unit CM Combat Mix ECM GCAS HUD Heads Up Display
Countermeasures System
Joint Directed Attack
AR Aerial Refueling CMS Countermeasure Set EFC Emergency Flight Control GMT Greenwich Mean Time JDAM
Munition
Attitude Reference Countermeasure Set Joint Terminal518
Attack
ARS CMSC EGI Embedded GPS INS GPS Global Positioning System JTAC
Symbol Control Controller
ACRONYM TABLE (2/2)
WARTHOG
JTRS Joint Tactical Radio System NMSP Navigation Mode Select Panel SER Single Ejector Rack TVV Total Velocity Vector
A-10C
KIAS Knots Indicated Airspeed NWS Nosewheel Steering SOI Sensor of Interest UFC Up Front Controller
LAAP Low Altitude Autopilot NVIS Night Vision Imaging System SPI Sensor Point of Interest UHF Ultra High Frequency
LAR Look Aside Ranging ORP Optimal Release Point SPJ Self Protection Jammer VHF Very High Frequency
Low Altitude Safety and Targeting
LASTE OSB Option Select Button SRU Shop Replaceable Unit VPU Vertical Position Uncertainty
Enhancement
Tactical Awareness
LOS Line Of Sight OWC Obstacle Warning Cue TAD VVI Vertical Velocity Indicator
Display
LRU Line Replaceable Unit PAC Precision Attitude Control TAS True Airspeed WCMD Wind Corrected Munition Dispensor
MAP Missed Approach Point PBIL Projected Bomb Impact Line TDC Target Designation Cursor WCN Warning, Caution, and Notes
MFCD Multifunction Color Display PR Passive Ranging TER Triple Ejector Rack
MGRS Military Grid Reference System PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency TGP Targeting Pod
Target Identification Set
MMCB Master Mode Control Button RGS Required Ground Speed TISL
Laser
Target Management
MRC Minimum Range Cue RIAS Required Indicated Airspeed TMS
Switch
Time of Fall / Time of
MRFCS Manual Reversion Flight Control System RTAS Required True Airspeed TOF
Flight
MRGS Multiple Reference Gunsight RWR Radar Warning Receiver TOT Time On Target
MRS Minimum Range Staple SADL Situational Awareness Datalink TP Target Practice
MSL Mean Sea Level SAI Standby Attitude Indicator TTG Time To Go
MWS Missile Warning System SAS Stability Augmentation System TTRN Time to Release Numeric 519
520
THANK YOU TO ALL MY PATRONS
Creating these guides is no easy task, and I would like to take the time to properly thank every single one of my Patreon supporters. The following people have donated a very generous
amount to help me keep supporting existing guides and work on new projects as well:
• Ed Wallitt
• Hoggit
• Casey Charles
• ChazFlyz
521
522

DCS A-10C Warthog Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS A-10C Warthog Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS A-10C Warthog Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the A-10 designed for?

What is the A-10 designed for?

What are some of the A-10's defensive capabilities?

What are some of the A-10's defensive capabilities?

DCS GUIDE

A-10C WARTHOG By Chuck

10's official name comes from the Republic P-47 Thunderbolt,

The A-10 was intended to improve on the performance of the A-1

enabling it to absorb a significant amount of damage and continue

671 pages long manual.

Still awake? All right, let’s get to it, shall we?

A-10C II Tank Killer

Zoom In Slow: L_Shift+TMS UP

To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

BIND THE FOLLOWING AXES:

• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

Lock moves sideways

Ejection Seat Handle

Emergency Manual Chute Control Handle

Anti-Collision Lights ON/OFF

Auxiliary Instruments Lights

Position Lights switch

Main Air Supply Switch

Cabin Air Temperature/Pressure Control Switch

Cabin Pressure Altitude Indicator (x1000 ft)

Bleed Air Control

Oxygen Supply Pressure (PSI)

Oxygen Dilution Lever

Oxygen Flow Indicator

Emergency Oxygen Lever

Oxygen Quantity Indicator (L)

Gyro) mode acts as a backup. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled

HDG (Heading) Knob

Magnetic Variation Selector Switch

ILS (Instrument Landing System) Volume

Control & Frequency Selector

TACAN Volume Control

TACAN Mode Selector

• Right Click: Toggles Power • A/A T/R: Air-to-Air TACAN Transmit-Receive

TACAN Channel TACAN Channel Selector

TACAN Test Button

TACAN Channel Selector

AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)

Unit) Page Selector Knob

Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob

Function Select Keys (FSK)

DTSAS: OPTIONS: current magnetic

LRUTEST: Line Replaceable

EGI Sub-Page INS Sub-Page

GPS Sub-Page REINIT Sub-Page

LASTE Sub-Page HARS Sub-Page

SYS Sub-Page DTSAS Sub-Page RESET Sub-Page 29

CDU Sub-Page (Page 1) CDUTEST Sub-Page (Page 2)

ALIGN Sub-Page TIME Sub-Page

UPDATE Sub-Page DTSUPLOAD Sub-Page

STEERPOINT Sub-Page 1 STEERPOINT Sub-Page 2

OSET (Offset) Menu FPMENU (Flight Plan) Menu

ANTI-SKID L-HYD RES R-HYD RES OXY LOW